Enable Intel AVX512_VP2INTERSECT insn
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
82704155 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
b8891f8d 24@set CSKY
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15 36@set Renesas
b4cbbe8f 37@set S/390
49fa1e15
AM
38@set SPU
39@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 40@set WIN32
e0001a05 41@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
42@end ifset
43@c man end
44
9160ea82
AM
45@ifnottex
46@dircategory Software development
47@direntry
252b5132 48* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
49@end direntry
50@end ifnottex
252b5132 51
0e9517a9 52@copying
e49e529d
JM
53This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56@end ifset
57version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 58
82704155 59Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 60
cf055d54 61Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 62under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
63or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 66section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 67@end copying
252b5132
RH
68@iftex
69@finalout
70@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 71@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 72@titlepage
71ba23f6 73@title The GNU linker
252b5132 74@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
75@subtitle @code{ld}
76@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78@end ifset
252b5132
RH
79@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80@author Steve Chamberlain
81@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
82@page
83
84@tex
85{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
86\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 88\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
89\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90}
91\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92@end tex
93
94@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 95@c man begin COPYRIGHT
82704155 96Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2019 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132 137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
159@ifset S/390
160* S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
162@ifset SPU
163* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
165@ifset TICOFF
166* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
168@ifset WIN32
169* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
171@ifset XTENSA
172* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173@end ifset
252b5132
RH
174@end ifclear
175@ifclear SingleFormat
176* BFD:: BFD
177@end ifclear
178@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 182* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 183* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 184@end menu
84ec0e6d 185@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
186
187@node Overview
188@chapter Overview
189
190@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 192
0879a67a 193@ifset man
0285c67d 194@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 195ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
196@c man end
197
198@c man begin SEEALSO
199ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201@file{ld}.
202@c man end
203@end ifset
204
205@c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 208their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 209compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 210
ff5dcc92 211@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
212a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
0285c67d
NC
215@ifset man
216@c For the man only
ece2d90e 217This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
218@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
220@end ifset
221
252b5132 222@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
223This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
225write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228@end ifclear
229
230Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 233@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
234(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
0285c67d
NC
236@c man end
237
252b5132
RH
238@node Invocation
239@chapter Invocation
240
0285c67d
NC
241@c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
ff5dcc92 243The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
244and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
0285c67d
NC
247@c man end
248
252b5132
RH
249@ifset UsesEnvVars
250@menu
a05a5b64 251* Options:: Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
252* Environment:: Environment Variables
253@end menu
254
255@node Options
a05a5b64 256@section Command-line Options
252b5132
RH
257@end ifset
258
259@cindex command line
260@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
261
262@c man begin OPTIONS
263
252b5132
RH
264The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 267For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
268object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271@smallexample
272ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273@end smallexample
274
ff5dcc92 275This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
276result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
ff5dcc92 280Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
281point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
286occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288noted in the descriptions below.
289
290@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
291Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
295
296Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300message @samp{No input files}.
301
36f63dca 302If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
303assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
308@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
313
314For options whose names are a single letter,
315option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317option that requires them.
318
319For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 320precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 321@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 322this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 323only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
324@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326output.
327
328Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333accepted.
252b5132 334
36f63dca 335Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
a05a5b64 336(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
337prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
339
340@smallexample
2509a395 341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
342@end smallexample
343
344This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
345silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352@smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354@end smallexample
4e53152f 355
a05a5b64 356Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
4e53152f
NC
357linker:
358
ff5dcc92 359@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 360@include at-file.texi
dff70155 361
2509a395
SL
362@kindex -a @var{keyword}
363@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
364This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
7ee314fa
AM
370@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 377it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 378This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 379interface.
7ee314fa 380
252b5132
RH
381@ifclear SingleFormat
382@cindex binary input format
383@kindex -b @var{format}
384@kindex --format=@var{format}
385@cindex input format
386@cindex input format
387@item -b @var{input-format}
388@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
389@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 391@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 392that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 393configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 394to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
395default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399@xref{BFD}.
400
401You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403linking object files of different formats), by including
404@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 405particular format.
252b5132
RH
406
407The default format is taken from the environment variable
408@code{GNUTARGET}.
409@ifset UsesEnvVars
410@xref{Environment}.
411@end ifset
412You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
413@code{TARGET};
414@ifclear man
415see @ref{Format Commands}.
416@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
417@end ifclear
418
419@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421@cindex compatibility, MRI
422@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 424For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 425files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
426@ifclear man
427@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428@end ifclear
429@ifset man
430the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431@end ifset
432Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 433the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
434scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
436specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438@cindex common allocation
439@kindex -d
440@kindex -dc
441@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 442@item -d
252b5132
RH
443@itemx -dc
444@itemx -dp
445These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
7ee314fa
AM
451@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 460The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 461
252b5132
RH
462@cindex entry point, from command line
463@kindex -e @var{entry}
464@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 465@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
466@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
b58f81ae
DJ
475@kindex --exclude-libs
476@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 478exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
479@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484be treated as hidden.
485
e1c37eb5
DK
486@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497regardless of this option.
498
252b5132
RH
499@cindex dynamic symbol table
500@kindex -E
501@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 502@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
503@item -E
504@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
505@itemx --no-export-dynamic
506When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
515
516If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519linking the program itself.
520
55255dae 521You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 522be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 523See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 524
8b747e1a
DK
525Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
36f63dca 529@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
530@cindex big-endian objects
531@cindex endianness
532@kindex -EB
533@item -EB
534Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536@cindex little-endian objects
537@kindex -EL
538@item -EL
539Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 540@end ifclear
252b5132 541
2509a395
SL
542@kindex -f @var{name}
543@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544@item -f @var{name}
545@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
546When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
a094d01f 559machine-specific performance.
252b5132
RH
560
561This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
2509a395
SL
564@kindex -F @var{name}
565@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 566@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 567@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
568When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579@var{name}.
580
ff5dcc92 581Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 582toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
583object files.
584@ifclear SingleFormat
585The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 586@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 587@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
588environment variable.
589@end ifclear
590The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 592
3dbf70a2 593@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
594@kindex -fini=@var{name}
595@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
596When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599the function to call.
600
252b5132
RH
601@kindex -g
602@item -g
603Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
2509a395
SL
605@kindex -G @var{value}
606@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 607@cindex object size
2509a395 608@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
609@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 612MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
613sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 616@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 617@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 618@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
619@itemx -soname=@var{name}
620When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626@kindex -i
627@cindex incremental link
628@item -i
629Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
3dbf70a2 631@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
632@kindex -init=@var{name}
633@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
634When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637function to call.
638
252b5132 639@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 640@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 641@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 642@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
643@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 647will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 648will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 649
ff5dcc92 650On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
651files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
658
659The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
ff5dcc92 666See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
667archives multiple times.
668
669You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671@ifset GENERIC
672This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 673if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
674behaviour of the AIX linker.
675@end ifset
676
677@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 678@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 679@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 680@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 681@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
682Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
684option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 687@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
688order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690option is specified.
252b5132 691
3aa2d05a
NC
692If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694@samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 695
252b5132
RH
696@ifset UsesEnvVars
697The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 698@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
699some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700@end ifset
701
702The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706@cindex emulation
707@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 708@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
709Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716configured.
717
718@cindex link map
719@kindex -M
720@kindex --print-map
721@item -M
722@itemx --print-map
723Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724information about the link, including the following:
725
726@itemize @bullet
727@item
3b83e13a 728Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
729@item
730How common symbols are allocated.
731@item
732All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
734@item
735The values assigned to symbols.
736
737Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743linker script containing:
744
745@smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749@end smallexample
750
751will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752option is used:
753
754@smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758@end smallexample
759
760See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761scripts.
d2ef37eb 762
06ddcada
AM
763@item
764How GNU properties are merged.
d2ef37eb 765
06ddcada
AM
766When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767.note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
d2ef37eb
L
769
770@smallexample
771Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772@end smallexample
773
06ddcada 774This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
d2ef37eb
L
775merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778@smallexample
06ddcada 779Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
d2ef37eb
L
780@end smallexample
781
06ddcada 782This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
d2ef37eb
L
783when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
252b5132
RH
785@end itemize
786
035801ce
FS
787@cindex link map discarded
788@kindex --print-map-discarded
789@kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790@item --print-map-discarded
791@itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
252b5132
RH
795@kindex -n
796@cindex read-only text
797@cindex NMAGIC
798@kindex --nmagic
799@item -n
800@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
801Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
804
805@kindex -N
806@kindex --omagic
807@cindex read/write from cmd line
808@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 809@item -N
252b5132
RH
810@itemx --omagic
811Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
812not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
814mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
817
818@kindex --no-omagic
819@cindex OMAGIC
820@item --no-omagic
821This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
825
826@kindex -o @var{output}
827@kindex --output=@var{output}
828@cindex naming the output file
829@item -o @var{output}
830@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 831Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
832option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835@kindex -O @var{level}
836@cindex generating optimized output
837@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 838If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 839the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
840should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 845
387dd777
DP
846@kindex -plugin @var{name}
847@item -plugin @var{name}
848Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852wish.
853
854Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856@command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
1c82ed74 858copied into the @file{$@{bindir@}/../lib/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
387dd777 859based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
6c19b93b 860just copy in the newest one.
387dd777 861
26278bb8
UD
862@kindex --push-state
863@cindex push state governing input file handling
864@item --push-state
865The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879something as follows:
880
881@smallexample
882-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883@end smallexample
884
885@kindex --pop-state
886@cindex pop state governing input file handling
67cecaba 887@item --pop-state
26278bb8
UD
888Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889flags governing input file handling.
890
a712da20
NC
891@kindex -q
892@kindex --emit-relocs
893@cindex retain relocations in final executable
894@item -q
895@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 896Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
897Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899in larger executables.
900
dbab7a7b
NC
901This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
4f471f39
RS
903@kindex --force-dynamic
904@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905@item --force-dynamic
906Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907to VxWorks targets.
908
252b5132
RH
909@cindex partial link
910@cindex relocatable output
911@kindex -r
1049f94e 912@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 913@item -r
1049f94e 914@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 915Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 916turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
917linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 920@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
921If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
62bf86b4
HPN
925When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929with input files in other formats at all.
930
252b5132
RH
931This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933@kindex -R @var{file}
934@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935@cindex symbol-only input
936@item -R @var{filename}
937@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
ff5dcc92 943For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 944followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 945the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
946
947@kindex -s
948@kindex --strip-all
949@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 950@item -s
252b5132
RH
951@itemx --strip-all
952Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954@kindex -S
955@kindex --strip-debug
956@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 957@item -S
252b5132
RH
958@itemx --strip-debug
959Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
a70f34c0
NC
961@kindex --strip-discarded
962@kindex --no-strip-discarded
963@item --strip-discarded
964@itemx --no-strip-discarded
965Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966Enabled by default.
967
252b5132
RH
968@kindex -t
969@kindex --trace
970@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 971@item -t
252b5132 972@itemx --trace
4f4690cd
AM
973Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974@samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975@samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977a linker bug report.
252b5132
RH
978
979@kindex -T @var{script}
980@kindex --script=@var{script}
981@cindex script files
982@item -T @var{scriptfile}
983@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 985@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 986@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
987output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990options accumulate.
252b5132 991
14be8564
L
992@kindex -dT @var{script}
993@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994@cindex script files
995@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006@samp{gcc}).
1007
252b5132
RH
1008@kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010@cindex undefined symbol
1011@item -u @var{symbol}
1012@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
0a618243
AB
1019If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022instead.
1023
1024@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025@cindex symbols, require defined
1026@cindex defined symbol
1027@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
252b5132
RH
1035@kindex -Ur
1036@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 1037@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
1038For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 1040turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
1041@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045@samp{-r} for the others.
1046
c005eb9e
AB
1047@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048@cindex orphan sections
1049@cindex sections, orphan
1050@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056@table @code
1057@item place
1058Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
d2732b69 1060@samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
c005eb9e
AB
1061
1062@item discard
1063All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066@item warn
1067The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068issue a warning.
1069
1070@item error
1071The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072@end table
1073
1074The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
577a0623
AM
1076@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1085
252b5132
RH
1086@kindex -v
1087@kindex -V
1088@kindex --version
1089@cindex version
1090@item -v
1091@itemx --version
1092@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1093Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1094lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096@kindex -x
1097@kindex --discard-all
1098@cindex deleting local symbols
1099@item -x
1100@itemx --discard-all
1101Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103@kindex -X
1104@kindex --discard-locals
1105@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1106@item -X
252b5132 1107@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1108Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1111
1112@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114@cindex symbol tracing
1115@item -y @var{symbol}
1116@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124@kindex -Y @var{path}
1125@item -Y @var{path}
1126Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1131The recognized keywords are:
1132@table @samp
1133
e6e2dfbd
AM
1134@item bndplt
1135Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
233a0083
L
1149@item cet-report=none
1150@itemx cet-report=warning
1151@itemx cet-report=error
1152Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156@option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
cd6d6c15 1164@item combreloc
e6e2dfbd
AM
1165@itemx nocombreloc
1166Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
cd6d6c15 1168
b8871f35 1169@item common
e6e2dfbd
AM
1170@itemx nocommon
1171Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177using pages of this size.
b8871f35 1178
cd6d6c15 1179@item defs
97a232d7
NC
1180Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
cd6d6c15 1183
e6e2dfbd
AM
1184@item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185@itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189@samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192these options.
1193
6aa29e7b
JJ
1194@item execstack
1195Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
b039ef04
L
1197@item global
1198This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
93ab9c0d
NC
1202@item globalaudit
1203This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
a05a5b64 1207the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
6c19b93b 1208all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
93ab9c0d 1209
e6e2dfbd
AM
1210@item ibtplt
1211Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
8df93cb5 1214@item ibt
e6e2dfbd
AM
1215Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
cd6d6c15
NC
1219@item initfirst
1220This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225objects.
1226
1227@item interpose
e6e2dfbd
AM
1228Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230libraries not so marked.
cd6d6c15 1231
5fa222e4
AM
1232@item lazy
1233When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236Lazy binding is the default.
1237
cd6d6c15 1238@item loadfltr
e6e2dfbd 1239Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
cd6d6c15 1240
e6e2dfbd
AM
1241@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
cd6d6c15 1243
e6e2dfbd
AM
1244@item muldefs
1245Allow multiple definitions.
b8871f35 1246
cd6d6c15 1247@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1248Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1250
1251@item nodefaultlib
e6e2dfbd
AM
1252Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253should ignore any default library search paths.
cd6d6c15
NC
1254
1255@item nodelete
e6e2dfbd 1256Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
cd6d6c15
NC
1257
1258@item nodlopen
e6e2dfbd 1259Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
cd6d6c15
NC
1260
1261@item nodump
e6e2dfbd 1262Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
cd6d6c15 1263
6aa29e7b
JJ
1264@item noexecstack
1265Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
e6e2dfbd
AM
1267@item noextern-protected-data
1268Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273i386 and x86-64.
8dfef1bd 1274
e6e2dfbd
AM
1275@item noreloc-overflow
1276Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
6aa29e7b 1279
cd6d6c15
NC
1280@item now
1281When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
e6e2dfbd
AM
1283when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285called.
cd6d6c15
NC
1286
1287@item origin
e6e2dfbd 1288Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
cd6d6c15 1289
6aa29e7b 1290@item relro
e6e2dfbd 1291@itemx norelro
def5c83c
AM
1292Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
e6e2dfbd 1296Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
6aa29e7b 1297
47acac12
L
1298@item separate-code
1299@itemx noseparate-code
1300Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
e6e2dfbd
AM
1305@item shstk
1306Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
24718e3b 1309
04c3a755 1310@item stack-size=@var{value}
e6e2dfbd 1311Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
04c3a755
NS
1312Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
e6e2dfbd
AM
1315@item text
1316@itemx notext
1317@itemx textoff
1318Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320@samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
48580982 1321
97a232d7
NC
1322@item undefs
1323Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
cd6d6c15
NC
1327@end table
1328
ece2d90e 1329Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1330
1331@kindex -(
1332@cindex groups of archives
1333@item -( @var{archives} -)
1334@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
5d3db3e2 1344they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
252b5132
RH
1345resolved.
1346
1347Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349more archives.
1350
69da35b5
NC
1351@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1356recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1357and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1362
4a43e768
AM
1363@kindex --as-needed
1364@kindex --no-as-needed
1365@item --as-needed
1366@itemx --no-as-needed
1367This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1368on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1369the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1371needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1372emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1374the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1376Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1380
e56f61be
L
1381@kindex --add-needed
1382@kindex --no-add-needed
1383@item --add-needed
1384@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1385These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1389
252b5132
RH
1390@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391@item -assert @var{keyword}
1392This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394@kindex -Bdynamic
1395@kindex -dy
1396@kindex -call_shared
1397@item -Bdynamic
1398@itemx -dy
1399@itemx -call_shared
1400Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1405@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1406
a1ab1d2a
UD
1407@kindex -Bgroup
1408@item -Bgroup
1409Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1412@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1414
252b5132
RH
1415@kindex -Bstatic
1416@kindex -dn
1417@kindex -non_shared
1418@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1419@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1420@itemx -dn
1421@itemx -non_shared
1422@itemx -static
1423Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1427library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1428option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1432libraries.
252b5132
RH
1433
1434@kindex -Bsymbolic
1435@item -Bsymbolic
1436When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1439within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1440@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1441executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1442the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1443support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1444
40b36307
L
1445@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1446@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1447When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1448symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1449This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1450when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1451to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1452This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1453libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1454
55255dae
L
1455@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1456@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1457Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1458typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1459global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1460within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1461to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1462in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1463which support shared libraries.
1464
1465The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1466scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1467
40b36307
L
1468@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1469@item --dynamic-list-data
1470Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1471
1472@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1473@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1474Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1475is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1476
0b8a70d9
L
1477@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1478@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1479Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1480
252b5132
RH
1481@kindex --check-sections
1482@kindex --no-check-sections
1483@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1484@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1485Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1486been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1487perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1488suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1489allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
a05a5b64 1490restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1491Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1492force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1493option.
252b5132 1494
ddbb8a31
NC
1495@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1496@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1497@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1498@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1499This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1500by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1501command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1502output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1503input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1504specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1505follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1506behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1507
1508This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1509libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1510mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1511their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1512required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1513the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1514dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1515symbols.
1516
252b5132
RH
1517@cindex cross reference table
1518@kindex --cref
1519@item --cref
1520Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1521generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1522Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1523
1524The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1525easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1526sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1527symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1528definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1529where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1530symbol are listed.
252b5132 1531
4818e05f
AM
1532@cindex common allocation
1533@kindex --no-define-common
1534@item --no-define-common
1535This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1536The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1537@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1538
1539The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1540the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1541of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1542forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1543Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1544from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1545This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1546and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1547duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1548paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1549
7bdf4127
AB
1550@cindex group allocation in linker script
1551@cindex section groups
1552@cindex COMDAT
1553@kindex --force-group-allocation
1554@item --force-group-allocation
1555This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1556normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1557default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1558change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1559command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1560effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1561
252b5132 1562@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1563@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1564@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1565Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1566address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1567times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1568limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1569context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1570symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1571constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1572using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1573@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1574equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1575
1576@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1577@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1578@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1579@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1580@itemx --no-demangle
1581These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1582and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1583present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1584underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1585mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1586different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1587to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1588demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1589is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1590
1591@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1592@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1593@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1594@item -I@var{file}
1595@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1596Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1597generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1598linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1599doing.
1600
9b8b325a
RF
1601@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1602@item --no-dynamic-linker
1603When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1604linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1605executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1606entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1607
a70f34c0
NC
1608@kindex --embedded-relocs
1609@item --embedded-relocs
1610This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
a094d01f 1611that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
a70f34c0
NC
1612is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1613targets.
1614
3f0a5f17
ME
1615@kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1616@item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1617Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1618in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1619
7ce691ae 1620@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1621@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1622@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1623@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1624Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1625with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1626
252b5132
RH
1627@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1628@item --force-exe-suffix
1629Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1630
1631If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1632@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1633the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1634option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1635Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1636it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1637
1638@kindex --gc-sections
1639@kindex --no-gc-sections
1640@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1641@item --gc-sections
1642@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1643Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1644targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1645performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1646@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1647collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1648implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1649
d5465ba2
AM
1650@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1651examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1652symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1653command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1654referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1655libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1656referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1657the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
b69e1ff3
CC
1658relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1659@samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
d5465ba2 1660
ac69cbc6 1661This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1662@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
b69e1ff3
CC
1663specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1664@samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1665command in the linker script.
ac69cbc6 1666
c17d87de
NC
1667@kindex --print-gc-sections
1668@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1669@cindex garbage collection
1670@item --print-gc-sections
1671@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1672List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1673printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1674collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1675default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1676be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1677line.
1678
22185505 1679@kindex --gc-keep-exported
1680@cindex garbage collection
1681@item --gc-keep-exported
1682When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1683collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1684default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1685executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1686collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1687Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1688it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1689ELF format targets.
1690
30824704
RM
1691@kindex --print-output-format
1692@cindex output format
1693@item --print-output-format
1694Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1695other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1696in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1697
3604cb1f
TG
1698@kindex --print-memory-usage
1699@cindex memory usage
1700@item --print-memory-usage
1701Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1702the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1703quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1704headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1705parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1706
1707@smallexample
1708Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1709 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1710 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1711@end smallexample
1712
252b5132
RH
1713@cindex help
1714@cindex usage
1715@kindex --help
1716@item --help
1717Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1718
ea20a7da
CC
1719@kindex --target-help
1720@item --target-help
a094d01f 1721Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
ea20a7da 1722
2509a395
SL
1723@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1724@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1725Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1726@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1727
1728@cindex memory usage
1729@kindex --no-keep-memory
1730@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1731@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1732symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1733instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1734necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1735while linking a large executable.
1736
1737@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1738@kindex -z defs
97a232d7 1739@kindex -z undefs
252b5132 1740@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1741@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1742Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1743is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1744The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1745behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1746libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1747
97a232d7
NC
1748The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1749
aa713662
L
1750@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1751@kindex -z muldefs
1752@item --allow-multiple-definition
1753@itemx -z muldefs
1754Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1755report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1756first definition will be used.
1757
b79e8c78 1758@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1759@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1760@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1761@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1762Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1763This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1764determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1765shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1766how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1767
903249d7
NC
1768The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1769referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1770an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1771a shared library.
1772
1773The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1774libraries specified at link time are that:
1775
1776@itemize @bullet
1777@item
1778A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1779that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1780resolvable at load time.
1781@item
1782There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1783symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1784
1785The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1786select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1787architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1788appropriate memset function.
1789@end itemize
b79e8c78 1790
31941635
L
1791@kindex --no-undefined-version
1792@item --no-undefined-version
1793Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1794it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1795will be issued instead.
1796
3e3b46e5
PB
1797@kindex --default-symver
1798@item --default-symver
1799Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1800exported symbols.
1801
1802@kindex --default-imported-symver
1803@item --default-imported-symver
1804Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1805imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1806
252b5132
RH
1807@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1808@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1809Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1810files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1811been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1812This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1813errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1814have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1815inappropriate.
1816
fe7929ce
AM
1817@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1818@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1819Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1820library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1821
252b5132
RH
1822@kindex --no-whole-archive
1823@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1824Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1825archive files.
1826
1827@cindex output file after errors
1828@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1829@item --noinhibit-exec
1830Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1831Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1832errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1833when it issues any error whatsoever.
1834
0a9c1c8e
CD
1835@kindex -nostdlib
1836@item -nostdlib
1837Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1838command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1839(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1840
252b5132 1841@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1842@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1843@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1844@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1845file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1846@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1847object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1848object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1849should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1850usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1851name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1852list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1853command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1854this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1855@end ifclear
1856
76359541
TP
1857@kindex --out-implib
1858@item --out-implib @var{file}
1859Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1860the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1861library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1862may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1863behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1864step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1865the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1866
36af4a4e
JJ
1867@kindex -pie
1868@kindex --pic-executable
1869@item -pie
1870@itemx --pic-executable
1871@cindex position independent executables
1872Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1873ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1874libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1875address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1876normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1877defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1878
252b5132
RH
1879@kindex -qmagic
1880@item -qmagic
1881This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1882
1883@kindex -Qy
1884@item -Qy
1885This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1886
1887@kindex --relax
1888@cindex synthesizing linker
1889@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1890@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1891@item --relax
28d5f677 1892@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1893An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1894@ifset GENERIC
1895This option is only supported on a few targets.
1896@end ifset
1897@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1898@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132 1899@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1900@ifset XTENSA
1901@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1902@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1903@ifset M68HC11
1904@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1905@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1906@ifset NIOSII
1907@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1908@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1909@ifset POWERPC
1910@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1911@end ifset
252b5132 1912
a094d01f 1913On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
28d5f677
NC
1914global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1915addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1916synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1917instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1918
1919On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1920debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1921@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1922This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1923family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1924@end ifset
1925
1926@ifset GENERIC
1927On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1928but ignored.
1929@end ifset
1930
28d5f677
NC
1931On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1932@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1933
252b5132
RH
1934@cindex retaining specified symbols
1935@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1936@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1937@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1938@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1939Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1940discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1941symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1942@ifset GENERIC
1943(such as VxWorks)
1944@end ifset
1945where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1946run-time memory.
1947
1948@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1949or symbols needed for relocations.
1950
1951You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1952line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1953
1954@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1955@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1956@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1957@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1958Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1959linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1960arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1961them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1962also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1963objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1964@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1965ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1966@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1967
ff5dcc92 1968The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1969SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1970@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1971runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1972options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1973gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1974file systems.
252b5132 1975
ff5dcc92 1976For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1977followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1978the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1979@end ifset
1980
1981@ifset GENERIC
1982@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1983@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1985When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1986happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1987of the input files.
1988
1989When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1990non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1991shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1992explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1993specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1994@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1995either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1996appearing multiple times.
1997
e680a6b6
NC
1998The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1999directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
2000containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2001and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
200264-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2003
2004The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2005@var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2006supported.
2007
28c309a2
NC
2008This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2009that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2010is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2011runtime linker would do.
2012
252b5132 2013The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 2014libraries:
252b5132
RH
2015@enumerate
2016@item
ff5dcc92 2017Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 2018@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2019Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2020between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2021specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2022used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
2023at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2024by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2025the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 2026@item
e2a83dd0
NC
2027On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2028@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2029environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 2030@item
ff5dcc92
SC
2031On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2032directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 2033@item
a1b8d843 2034For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 2035variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 2036@item
ec4eb78a
L
2037For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2038@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2039libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2040@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2041@item
252b5132
RH
2042The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2043@item
2044For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2045exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2046@end enumerate
2047
2048If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2049warning and continue with the link.
2050@end ifset
2051
2052@kindex -shared
2053@kindex -Bshareable
2054@item -shared
2055@itemx -Bshareable
2056@cindex shared libraries
2057Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2058and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 2059shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
2060undefined symbols in the link.
2061
252b5132 2062@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
2063@item --sort-common
2064@itemx --sort-common=ascending
2065@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
2066This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2067ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2068sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2069eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2070between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2071specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 2072
2509a395
SL
2073@kindex --sort-section=name
2074@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
2075This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2076patterns in the linker script.
2077
2509a395
SL
2078@kindex --sort-section=alignment
2079@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
2080This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2081patterns in the linker script.
2082
a70f34c0
NC
2083@kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2084@item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2085This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2086.dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2087post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2088
252b5132 2089@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 2090@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 2091Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
2092each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2093size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
2094
2095@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 2096@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 2097Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 2098output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 2099This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
2100certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2101cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2102that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2103support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2104input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2105more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 2106many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
2107
2108@kindex --stats
2109@item --stats
2110Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2111as execution time and memory usage.
2112
2509a395 2113@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
2114@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2115Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2116configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2117that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2118
a70f34c0
NC
2119@kindex --task-link
2120@item --task-link
2121This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2122file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2123
252b5132
RH
2124@kindex --traditional-format
2125@cindex traditional format
2126@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
2127For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2128the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
2129use the traditional format instead.
2130
2131@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 2132For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
2133symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2134full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2135@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 2136trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
2137combine duplicate entries.
2138
2509a395
SL
2139@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
2141Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2142address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2143times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2144line.
2145@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2146for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2147@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2148should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2149sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2150
2509a395
SL
2151@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2152@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2153@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 2154@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
2155@item -Tbss=@var{org}
2156@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2157@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2158Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 2159@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 2160
2509a395
SL
2161@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 2163@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
2164When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2165byte of the text segment.
258795f5 2166
9d5777a3
RM
2167@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2169@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2170When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2171the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2172text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2173
0d705e9f
AM
2174@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2176@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2177When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2178model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2179
560e09e9
NC
2180@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2181@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2182Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2183values for @samp{method}:
2184
2185@table @samp
2186@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2187Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2188
2189@item report-all
da8bce14 2190Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2191
2192@item ignore-in-object-files
2193Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2194ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2195
2196@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2197Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2198ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2199when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2200libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2201command line.
2202@end table
2203
2204The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2205by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2206
2207Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2208unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2209can change this to a warning.
2210
1715a13c
L
2211@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2213@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2214@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2215Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2216supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2217the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2218argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2219
2220@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2221@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2222@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2223Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2224used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2225about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2226is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2227see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2228use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2229symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2230@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2231
7ce691ae 2232@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2233@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2234@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2235@item --warn-common
2236Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2237a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2238but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2239you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2240Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2241warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2242
2243There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2244
2245@table @samp
2246@item int i = 1;
2247A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2248file.
2249
2250@item extern int i;
2251An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2252There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2253variable somewhere.
2254
2255@item int i;
2256A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2257variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2258The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2259single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2260size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2261a definition of the same variable.
2262@end table
2263
2264The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2265Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2266just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2267encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2268a common symbol.
2269
2270@enumerate
2271@item
2272Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2273definition for the symbol.
2274@smallexample
2275@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2276 overridden by definition
2277@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2278@end smallexample
2279
2280@item
2281Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2282the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2283except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2284@smallexample
2285@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2286 overriding common
2287@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2288@end smallexample
2289
2290@item
2291Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2292@smallexample
2293@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2294 of `@var{symbol}'
2295@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2296@end smallexample
2297
2298@item
2299Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2300@smallexample
2301@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2302 overridden by larger common
2303@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2304@end smallexample
2305
2306@item
2307Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2308the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2309encountered in a different order.
2310@smallexample
2311@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2312 overriding smaller common
2313@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2314@end smallexample
2315@end enumerate
2316
2317@kindex --warn-constructors
2318@item --warn-constructors
2319Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2320object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2321detect the use of global constructors.
2322
2323@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2324@item --warn-multiple-gp
2325Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2326This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2327Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2328section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2329of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2330base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2331base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2332bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2333large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2334values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2335option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2336
2337@kindex --warn-once
2338@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2339@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2340@item --warn-once
2341Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2342which refers to it.
2343
2344@kindex --warn-section-align
2345@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2346@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2347@item --warn-section-align
2348Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2349alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2350The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2351is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2352the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2353
8fdd7217
NC
2354@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2355@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2356Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2357
a0c402a5
L
2358@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2359@item --warn-alternate-em
2360Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2361
560e09e9
NC
2362@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2364If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2365@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2366This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2367
2368@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2369@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2370This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2371it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2372
252b5132
RH
2373@kindex --whole-archive
2374@cindex including an entire archive
2375@item --whole-archive
2376For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2377@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2378in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2379files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2380library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2381library. This option may be used more than once.
2382
7ec229ce 2383Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2384about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2385Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2386list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2387your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2388
2509a395
SL
2389@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2391Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2392@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2393undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2394@var{symbol}.
2395
2396This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2397wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2398wishes to call the system function, it should call
2399@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2400
2401Here is a trivial example:
2402
2403@smallexample
2404void *
cc2f008e 2405__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2406@{
cc2f008e 2407 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2408 return __real_malloc (c);
2409@}
2410@end smallexample
2411
ff5dcc92 2412If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2413all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2414instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2415call the real @code{malloc} function.
2416
2417You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2418links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2419you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2420file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2421call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2422
4ea904ed
SH
2423Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2424internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2425@code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2426@code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2427
2428@smallexample
2429int
2430f (void)
2431@{
2432 return 123;
2433@}
2434
2435int
2436g (void)
2437@{
2438 return f();
2439@}
2440@end smallexample
2441
6aa29e7b 2442@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b 2443@kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
6aa29e7b 2444@item --eh-frame-hdr
29063f8b
NC
2445@itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2446Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2447(@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2448section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
6aa29e7b 2449
e41b3a13
JJ
2450@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2451@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2452Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2453generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2454if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2455
6c1439be
L
2456@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2457@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2458@item --enable-new-dtags
2459@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2460This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2461systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2462@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2463and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2464If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2465created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2466those options are only available for ELF systems.
2467
2d643429 2468@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2469@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2470Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2471close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2472time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2473increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2474value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2475
fdc90cb4
JJ
2476@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2477@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2478Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2479@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2480new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2481the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
c8455dc9
NC
2482hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2483but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
fdc90cb4 2484
0ce398f1
L
2485@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2486@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2487@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2488@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2489@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2490@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2491@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2492@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
9af89fba
NC
2493On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2494compressed using zlib.
2495
2496@option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2497sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2498DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2499instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2500also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2501sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2502
2503The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2504@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2505
2506Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2507sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2508for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2509uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2510
2511The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2512involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2513default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2514@option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2515
35835446
JR
2516@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2517@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2518This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2519linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2520for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2521about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2522
4f9c04f7 2523Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 25241021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2525run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2526has been used.
2527
2528The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2529enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2530
c0065db7
RM
2531@kindex --build-id
2532@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2533@item --build-id
2534@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2535Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2536or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2537unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2538@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2539@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2540@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2541the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2542string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2543@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2544is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2545
2546The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2547that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2548unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2549to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2550file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2551string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2552
2553Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2554@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2555@end table
2556
0285c67d
NC
2557@c man end
2558
36f63dca 2559@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2560
0285c67d
NC
2561@c man begin OPTIONS
2562
ff5dcc92 2563The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2564the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2565normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2566use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2567@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2568like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2569symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2570object file).
2571
2572In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
a05a5b64 2573support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
252b5132
RH
2574PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2575values by either a space or an equals sign.
2576
ff5dcc92 2577@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2578
2579@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2580@item --add-stdcall-alias
2581If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2582as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2583[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2584
2585@kindex --base-file
2586@item --base-file @var{file}
2587Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2588addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2589@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2590[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2591
2592@kindex --dll
2593@item --dll
2594Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2595@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2596file.
bb10df36 2597[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2598
88183869
DK
2599@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2600@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2601@item --enable-long-section-names
2602@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2603The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2604the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2605for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2606fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2607to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2608allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2609disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2610generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2611as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2612with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2613GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2614information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2615option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2616section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2617when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2618image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2619[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2620
252b5132
RH
2621@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2622@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2623@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2624@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2625If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2626do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2627only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2628resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2629undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2630@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2631to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2632warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2633import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2634to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2635feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2636@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2637mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2638[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2639
522f09cd
KT
2640@kindex --leading-underscore
2641@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2642@item --leading-underscore
2643@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2644For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2645in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2646disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2647
252b5132
RH
2648@cindex DLLs, creating
2649@kindex --export-all-symbols
2650@item --export-all-symbols
2651If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2652be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2653otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2654explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2655attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2656option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2657@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2658@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2659exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2660re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2661such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2662@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2663@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2664Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2665not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2666extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2667(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2668These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2669@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2670@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2671@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2672@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2673[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2674
2675@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2676@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2677Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2678exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2679[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2680
2927aaca
NC
2681@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2682@item --exclude-all-symbols
2683Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2684[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2685
252b5132
RH
2686@kindex --file-alignment
2687@item --file-alignment
2688Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2689file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2690512.
bb10df36 2691[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@cindex heap size
2694@kindex --heap
2695@item --heap @var{reserve}
2696@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2697Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2698to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2699committed.
bb10df36 2700[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2701
2702@cindex image base
2703@kindex --image-base
2704@item --image-base @var{value}
2705Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2706the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2707is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2708your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2709other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2710for dlls.
bb10df36 2711[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2712
2713@kindex --kill-at
2714@item --kill-at
2715If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2716symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2717[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2718
26d2d8a2
BF
2719@kindex --large-address-aware
2720@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2721If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2722header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2723greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2724or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2725section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2726[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2727
f69a2f97
NC
2728@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2729@item --disable-large-address-aware
2730Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2731This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2732driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2733addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2734[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2735
252b5132
RH
2736@kindex --major-image-version
2737@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2738Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2739[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2740
2741@kindex --major-os-version
2742@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2743Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2744[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2745
2746@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2747@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2748Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2749[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2750
2751@kindex --minor-image-version
2752@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2753Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2754[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2755
2756@kindex --minor-os-version
2757@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2758Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2759[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2760
2761@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2762@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2763Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2764[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2765
2766@cindex DEF files, creating
2767@cindex DLLs, creating
2768@kindex --output-def
2769@item --output-def @var{file}
2770The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2771file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2772(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2773library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2774automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2775[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2776
b044cda1 2777@cindex DLLs, creating
b044cda1
CW
2778@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2779@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2780@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2781Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2782@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2783By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2784for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2785execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2786[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2787
2788@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2789@item --disable-auto-image-base
2790Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2791user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2792default.
bb10df36 2793[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2794
2795@cindex DLLs, linking to
2796@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2797@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2798When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2799search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2800@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2801between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2802uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2803@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2804[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2805
2806@kindex --enable-auto-import
2807@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e 2808Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
317ff008
EB
2809DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2810mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2811[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2812
2813The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2814feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2815
2816Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2817of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2818PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
4d8907ac 2819
e2a83dd0
NC
2820Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2821data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2822placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2823around a problem with consts that is described here:
2824http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2825
4d8907ac
DS
2826Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2827see this message:
0d888aac 2828
ece2d90e 2829"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2830documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2831
ece2d90e
NC
2832This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2833ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2834allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2835fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2836constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2837multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2838this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2839of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2840the warning, and exit.
2841
2842There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2843data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2844
2fa9fc65
NC
2845One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2846of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2847this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2848
c0065db7
RM
2849A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2850that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2851there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2852a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2853
2854@example
2855extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2856extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2857 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2858@end example
2859
2860or
2861
2862@example
2863extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2864extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2865 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2866@end example
2867
c0065db7 2868For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2869is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2870
2871@example
2872extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2873extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2874 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2875@end example
2876
c406afaf
NC
2877or
2878
2879@example
2880extern long long extern_ll;
2881extern_ll -->
2882 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2883@end example
2884
2fa9fc65 2885A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2886'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2887@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2888requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2889building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2890merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2891between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2892constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2893
2894Original:
2895@example
2896--foo.h
2897extern int arr[];
2898--foo.c
2899#include "foo.h"
2900void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2901 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2902@}
2903@end example
2904
2905Solution 1:
2906@example
2907--foo.h
2908extern int arr[];
2909--foo.c
2910#include "foo.h"
2911void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2912 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2913 volatile int *parr = arr;
2914 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2915@}
2916@end example
2917
2918Solution 2:
2919@example
2920--foo.h
2921/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2922#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2923 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2924#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2925#else
2926#define FOO_IMPORT
2927#endif
2928extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2929--foo.c
2930#include "foo.h"
2931void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2932 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2933@}
2934@end example
2935
c0065db7 2936A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2937library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2938for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2939functions).
b044cda1
CW
2940
2941@kindex --disable-auto-import
2942@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2943Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2944@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2945[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2946
2fa9fc65
NC
2947@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2949If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2950that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2951a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2952environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2953[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2954
2955@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
317ff008 2957Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2958[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2959
b044cda1
CW
2960@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2962Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2963[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2964
252b5132
RH
2965@kindex --section-alignment
2966@item --section-alignment
2967Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2968addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2969[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2970
2971@cindex stack size
2972@kindex --stack
2973@item --stack @var{reserve}
2974@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2975Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2976to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2977committed.
bb10df36 2978[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2979
2980@kindex --subsystem
2981@item --subsystem @var{which}
2982@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2983@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2984Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2985legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2986@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2987the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2988@var{which}.
bb10df36 2989[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2990
2f563b51
DK
2991The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2992of the PE file header:
2993[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2994
2d5c3743
NC
2995@kindex --high-entropy-va
2996@item --high-entropy-va
2997Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2998(ASLR).
2999
2f563b51
DK
3000@kindex --dynamicbase
3001@item --dynamicbase
3002The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3003randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3004Vista for i386 PE targets.
3005
3006@kindex --forceinteg
3007@item --forceinteg
3008Code integrity checks are enforced.
3009
3010@kindex --nxcompat
3011@item --nxcompat
3012The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3013This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3014
3015@kindex --no-isolation
3016@item --no-isolation
3017Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3018
3019@kindex --no-seh
3020@item --no-seh
3021The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3022this image.
3023
3024@kindex --no-bind
3025@item --no-bind
3026Do not bind this image.
3027
3028@kindex --wdmdriver
3029@item --wdmdriver
3030The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 3031
2f563b51
DK
3032@kindex --tsaware
3033@item --tsaware
3034The image is Terminal Server aware.
3035
0cb112f7
CF
3036@kindex --insert-timestamp
3037@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
3038@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3039Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3040as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3041other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 3042will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
3043same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3044can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 3045that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 3046identically.
252b5132
RH
3047@end table
3048
0285c67d
NC
3049@c man end
3050
ac145307
BS
3051@ifset C6X
3052@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3053
3054@c man begin OPTIONS
3055
3056The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3057libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3058all executables use an index of 0.
3059
3060@table @gcctabopt
3061
3062@kindex --dsbt-size
3063@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 3064This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
3065or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3066entries.
3067
3068@kindex --dsbt-index
3069@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3070This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3071to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3072executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3073@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3074
fbd9ad90
PB
3075@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3076The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3077exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3078
ac145307
BS
3079@end table
3080
3081@c man end
3082@end ifset
3083
b8891f8d
AJ
3084@ifset CSKY
3085@subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3086
3087@c man begin OPTIONS
3088
3089@table @gcctabopt
3090
3091@kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3092@item --branch-stub
3093This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3094sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3095usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3096can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3097the compiler or assembler.
3098
3099@kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3100@item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3101This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3102It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3103be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3104stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3105sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3106@samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3107linker should choose suitable defaults.
3108
3109@end table
3110
3111@c man end
3112@end ifset
3113
93fd0973
SC
3114@ifset M68HC11
3115@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3116
3117@c man begin OPTIONS
3118
3119The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3120memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3121
3122@table @gcctabopt
3123
3124@kindex --no-trampoline
3125@item --no-trampoline
3126This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3127is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3128instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3129
3130@kindex --bank-window
3131@item --bank-window @var{name}
3132This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3133the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3134The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3135paging and addresses within the memory window.
3136
3137@end table
3138
3139@c man end
3140@end ifset
3141
7fb9f789
NC
3142@ifset M68K
3143@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3144
3145@c man begin OPTIONS
3146
3147The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3148when linking for 68K targets.
3149
3150@table @gcctabopt
3151
3152@kindex --got
3153@item --got=@var{type}
3154This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3155@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3156@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3157Info entry for @file{ld}.
3158
3159@end table
3160
3161@c man end
3162@end ifset
3163
833794fc
MR
3164@ifset MIPS
3165@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3166
3167@c man begin OPTIONS
3168
3169The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
8b10b0b3
MR
3170generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3171linking for MIPS targets.
833794fc
MR
3172
3173@table @gcctabopt
3174
3175@kindex --insn32
3176@item --insn32
3177@kindex --no-insn32
3178@itemx --no-insn32
3179These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3180generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3181or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
318232-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3183used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3184possible.
3185
8b10b0b3
MR
3186@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3187@item --ignore-branch-isa
3188@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3189@itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3190These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3191transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3192accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3193is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3194instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3195equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3196calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3197a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3198an error.
3199
3734320d
MF
3200@kindex --compact-branches
3201@item --compact-branches
3202@kindex --no-compact-branches
3203@item --compact-branches
3204These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3205in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3206
833794fc
MR
3207@end table
3208
3209@c man end
3210@end ifset
3211
252b5132
RH
3212@ifset UsesEnvVars
3213@node Environment
3214@section Environment Variables
3215
0285c67d
NC
3216@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3217
560e09e9 3218You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
3219@ifclear SingleFormat
3220@code{GNUTARGET},
3221@end ifclear
3222@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 3223
36f63dca 3224@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
3225@kindex GNUTARGET
3226@cindex default input format
3227@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3228use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3229of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 3230@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
3231of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3232attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3233this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3234there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3235object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3236BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3237in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 3238@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
3239
3240@kindex LDEMULATION
3241@cindex default emulation
3242@cindex emulation, default
3243@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3244@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3245behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3246available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3247the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3248variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3249linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
3250
3251@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3252@cindex demangling, default
3253Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3254@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3255default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3256a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3257may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3258options.
3259
0285c67d
NC
3260@c man end
3261@end ifset
3262
252b5132
RH
3263@node Scripts
3264@chapter Linker Scripts
3265
3266@cindex scripts
3267@cindex linker scripts
3268@cindex command files
3269Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3270written in the linker command language.
3271
3272The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3273the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3274the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3275more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3276direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3277described below.
3278
3279The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3280yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
a05a5b64
TP
3281linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3282to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
252b5132
RH
3283such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3284
3285You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3286line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3287default linker script.
3288
3289You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3290to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3291Linker Scripts}.
3292
3293@menu
3294* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3295* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3296* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3297* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3298* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3299* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3300* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3301* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3302* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3303* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3304* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3305@end menu
3306
3307@node Basic Script Concepts
3308@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3309@cindex linker script concepts
3310We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3311describe the linker script language.
3312
3313The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3314file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3315@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3316The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3317purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3318among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3319section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3320in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3321
3322Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3323also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3324contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3325the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3326A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3327area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3328loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3329which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3330of debugging information.
3331
3332Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3333first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3334the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3335@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3336section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3337same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3338is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3339(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3340based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3341RAM address would be the VMA.
3342
3343You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3344program with the @samp{-h} option.
3345
3346Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3347@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3348has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3349information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3350will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3351static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3352referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3353
3354You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3355program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3356option.
3357
3358@node Script Format
3359@section Linker Script Format
3360@cindex linker script format
3361Linker scripts are text files.
3362
3363You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3364either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3365symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3366generally ignored.
3367
3368Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3369If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3370otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3371double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3372file name.
3373
3374You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3375@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3376to whitespace.
3377
3378@node Simple Example
3379@section Simple Linker Script Example
3380@cindex linker script example
3381@cindex example of linker script
3382Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3383
3384The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3385@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3386memory layout of the output file.
3387
3388The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3389describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3390code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3391@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3392Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3393your input files.
3394
3395For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
33960x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3397linker script which will do that:
3398@smallexample
3399SECTIONS
3400@{
3401 . = 0x10000;
3402 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3403 . = 0x8000000;
3404 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3405 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3406@}
3407@end smallexample
3408
3409You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3410followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3411descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3412
252b5132
RH
3413The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3414sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3415counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3416other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3417current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3418incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3419@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3420
3421The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3422required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3423after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3424which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3425wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3426means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3427
3428Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3429@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3430@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3431
3432The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3433the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3434at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3435output section, the value of the location counter will be
3436@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3437effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3438immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3439
3440The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3441alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3442example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3443sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3444may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3445sections.
3446
3447That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3448
3449@node Simple Commands
3450@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3451@cindex linker script simple commands
3452In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3453
3454@menu
3455* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3456* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3457@ifclear SingleFormat
3458* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3459@end ifclear
3460
4a93e180 3461* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3462* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3463@end menu
3464
3465@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3466@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3467@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3468@cindex start of execution
3469@cindex first instruction
3470@cindex entry point
3471The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3472point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3473entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3474@smallexample
3475ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3476@end smallexample
3477
3478There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3479entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3480stopping when one of them succeeds:
3481@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3482@item
252b5132 3483the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3484@item
252b5132 3485the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3486@item
a094d01f 3487the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
8a758655 3488targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3ab904c4 3489check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3490@item
252b5132 3491the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3492@item
252b5132
RH
3493The address @code{0}.
3494@end itemize
3495
3496@node File Commands
36f63dca 3497@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3498@cindex linker script file commands
3499Several linker script commands deal with files.
3500
3501@table @code
3502@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3503@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3504@cindex including a linker script
3505Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3506be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3507with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
350810 levels deep.
3509
4006703d
NS
3510You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3511@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3512
252b5132
RH
3513@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3514@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3515@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3516@cindex input files in linker scripts
3517@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3518@cindex linker script input object files
3519The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3520in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3521
3522For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3523a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3524then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3525
3526In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3527script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3528
e3f2db7f
AO
3529In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3530with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3531located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3532for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3533open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3534linker will search through the archive library search path.
3535The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3aa2d05a
NC
3536as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3537path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
a05a5b64 3538@ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3539
ff5dcc92 3540If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
a05a5b64 3541name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
252b5132
RH
3542@samp{-l}.
3543
3544When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3545files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3546script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3547
3548@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3549@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3550@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3551@cindex grouping input files
3552The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3553files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3554new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
a05a5b64 3555in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
252b5132 3556
b717d30e
JJ
3557@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3558@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3559@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3560This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3561commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3562as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3563with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3564when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3565@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3566and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3567setting afterwards.
3568
252b5132
RH
3569@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3570@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3571@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3572The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3573@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3574@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
a05a5b64 3575Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
252b5132
RH
3576precedence.
3577
3578You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3579output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3580
3581@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3582@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3583@cindex library search path in linker script
3584@cindex archive search path in linker script
3585@cindex search path in linker script
3586The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3587@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132 3588@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
a05a5b64 3589on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
252b5132 3590are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
a05a5b64 3591the command-line option are searched first.
252b5132
RH
3592
3593@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3594@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3595@cindex first input file
3596The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3597that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3598though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3599when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3600first file.
3601@end table
3602
3603@ifclear SingleFormat
3604@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3605@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3606A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3607
3608@table @code
3609@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3610@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3611@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3612@cindex output file format in linker script
3613The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3614output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3615exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3616(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
252b5132
RH
3617line option takes precedence.
3618
3619You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
a05a5b64 3620formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
252b5132
RH
3621This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3622desired endianness.
3623
3624If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3625will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3626output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3627used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3628
3629For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3630command:
3631@smallexample
3632OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3633@end smallexample
3634This says that the default format for the output file is
a05a5b64 3635@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
252b5132
RH
3636option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3637format.
3638
3639@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3640@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3641@cindex input file format in linker script
3642The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3643files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3644This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
a05a5b64 3645(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
252b5132
RH
3646is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3647command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3648@end table
3649@end ifclear
3650
4a93e180
NC
3651@node REGION_ALIAS
3652@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3653@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3654@cindex region alias
3655@cindex region names
3656
3657Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3658@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3659
3660@smallexample
3661REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3662@end smallexample
3663
3664The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3665memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3666to memory regions. An example follows.
3667
3668Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3669memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3670that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3671non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3672access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3673read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3674sections:
3675
3676@itemize @bullet
3677@item
3678@code{.text} program code;
3679@item
3680@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3681@item
3682@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3683@item
3684@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3685@end itemize
3686
3687The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3688part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3689output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3690systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3691@code{C}:
3692@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3693@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3694@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3695@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3696@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3697@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3698@end multitable
3699The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3700loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3701the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3702the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3703
3704The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3705includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3706memory layout:
3707@smallexample
3708INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3709
3710SECTIONS
3711 @{
3712 .text :
3713 @{
3714 *(.text)
3715 @} > REGION_TEXT
3716 .rodata :
3717 @{
3718 *(.rodata)
3719 rodata_end = .;
3720 @} > REGION_RODATA
3721 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3722 @{
3723 data_start = .;
3724 *(.data)
3725 @} > REGION_DATA
3726 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3727 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3728 .bss :
3729 @{
3730 *(.bss)
3731 @} > REGION_BSS
3732 @}
3733@end smallexample
3734
3735Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3736regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3737variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3738@table @code
3739@item A
3740Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3741@smallexample
3742MEMORY
3743 @{
3744 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3745 @}
3746
3747REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3748REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3749REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3750REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3751@end smallexample
3752@item B
3753Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3754into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3755@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3756@smallexample
3757MEMORY
3758 @{
3759 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3760 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3761 @}
3762
3763REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3764REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3765REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3766REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3767@end smallexample
3768@item C
3769Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3770@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3771initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3772system start into the @code{RAM}.
3773@smallexample
3774MEMORY
3775 @{
3776 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3777 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3778 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3779 @}
3780
3781REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3782REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3783REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3784REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3785@end smallexample
3786@end table
3787
3788It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3789@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3790necessary:
3791@smallexample
3792#include <string.h>
3793
3794extern char data_start [];
3795extern char data_size [];
3796extern char data_load_start [];
3797
3798void copy_data(void)
3799@{
3800 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3801 @{
3802 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3803 @}
3804@}
3805@end smallexample
3806
252b5132 3807@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3808@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3809There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3810
3811@table @code
3812@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3813@kindex ASSERT
3814@cindex assertion in linker script
3815Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3816with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3817
fd1c4238
NC
3818Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3819take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3820inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3821for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3822symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3823
3824@smallexample
3825 .stack :
3826 @{
3827 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3828 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3829 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3830 @}
3831@end smallexample
3832
3833will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3834PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3835can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3839 .stack :
3840 @{
3841 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3842 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3843 @}
3844@end smallexample
3845
3846will work.
3847
252b5132
RH
3848@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3849@kindex EXTERN
3850@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3851Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3852symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3853modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3854each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3855command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3856
3857@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3858@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3859@cindex common allocation in linker script
3860This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3861to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3862output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3863
4818e05f
AM
3864@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3866@cindex common allocation in linker script
3867This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3868command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3869to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3870
7bdf4127
AB
3871@item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3872@kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3873@cindex group allocation in linker script
3874@cindex section groups
3875@cindex COMDAT
3876This command has the same effect as the
3877@samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3878@command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3879and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3880specified (@samp{-r}).
3881
53d25da6
AM
3882@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3883@kindex INSERT
3884@cindex insert user script into default script
3885This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3886augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3887inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3888@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3889default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3890sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3891linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3892insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3893linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3894default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3895of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3896to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3897is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3898
3899@smallexample
3900SECTIONS
3901@{
3902 OVERLAY :
3903 @{
3904 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3905 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3906 @}
3907@}
3908INSERT AFTER .text;
3909@end smallexample
3910
252b5132
RH
3911@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3912@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3913@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3914This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3915references among certain output sections.
3916
3917In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3918using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3919will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3920errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3921a function defined in the other section.
3922
3923The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3924@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3925an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3926@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3927names.
3928
cdf96953
MF
3929@item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3930@kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3931@cindex cross references
3932This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3933references to one section from a list of other sections.
3934
3935The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3936output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3937a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3938there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3939must never call back.
3940
3941The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3942The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3943If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3944the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3945status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3946names, not input section names.
3947
252b5132
RH
3948@ifclear SingleFormat
3949@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3950@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3951@cindex machine architecture
3952@cindex architecture
3953Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3954of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3955architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3956the @samp{-f} option.
3957@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3958
3959@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3960@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3961This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3962@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3963in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3964@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3965@end table
3966
3967@node Assignments
3968@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3969@cindex assignment in scripts
3970@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3971@cindex variables, defining
3972You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3973the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3974
3975@menu
3976* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3977* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3978* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3979* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3980* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3981@end menu
3982
3983@node Simple Assignments
3984@subsection Simple Assignments
3985
3986You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3987
3988@table @code
3989@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3990@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3991@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3992@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3993@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3994@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3995@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3996@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3997@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3998@end table
3999
4000The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4001@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4002defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4003
4004The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 4005may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
4006
4007The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4008
4009Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4010
4011You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4012statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4013section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4014
4015The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4016expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4017
4018Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4019assignments may be used:
4020
4021@smallexample
4022floating_point = 0;
4023SECTIONS
4024@{
4025 .text :
4026 @{
4027 *(.text)
4028 _etext = .;
4029 @}
156e34dd 4030 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
4031 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4032@}
4033@end smallexample
4034@noindent
4035In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4036zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4037the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4038defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4039upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4040
eb8476a6
MR
4041@node HIDDEN
4042@subsection HIDDEN
4043@cindex HIDDEN
4044For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4045exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4046
4047Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4048@code{HIDDEN}:
4049
4050@smallexample
4051HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4052SECTIONS
4053@{
4054 .text :
4055 @{
4056 *(.text)
4057 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4058 @}
4059 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4060 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4061@}
4062@end smallexample
4063@noindent
4064In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4065
252b5132
RH
4066@node PROVIDE
4067@subsection PROVIDE
4068@cindex PROVIDE
4069In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4070only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4071the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4072@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4073@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4074@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4075@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4076@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4077
4078Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4079@smallexample
4080SECTIONS
4081@{
4082 .text :
4083 @{
4084 *(.text)
4085 _etext = .;
4086 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4087 @}
4088@}
4089@end smallexample
4090
4091In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4092underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4093the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4094underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4095If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4096linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4097
b0daac83
NC
4098Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4099defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4100that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4101when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4102@samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4103
7af8e998
L
4104@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4105@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4106@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4107Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4108hidden and won't be exported.
4109
73ae6183
NC
4110@node Source Code Reference
4111@subsection Source Code Reference
4112
4113Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4114intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4115a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4116symbol that does not have a value.
4117
4118Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4119transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4120stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4121prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4122mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4123of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4124variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4125linker script variable might be referred to as:
4126
4127@smallexample
4128 extern int foo;
4129@end smallexample
4130
4131But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4132
4133@smallexample
4134 _foo = 1000;
4135@end smallexample
4136
4137In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4138transformation has taken place.
4139
4140When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4141things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4142in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4143second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4144table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4145contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4146value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4147
4148@smallexample
4149 int foo = 1000;
4150@end smallexample
4151
10bf6894 4152creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
4153holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4154number 1000 is initially stored.
4155
4156When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4157first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4158memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4159So:
4160
4161@smallexample
4162 foo = 1;
4163@end smallexample
4164
4165looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4166associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4167address. Whereas:
4168
4169@smallexample
4170 int * a = & foo;
4171@end smallexample
4172
10bf6894 4173looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
4174and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4175the variable @samp{a}.
4176
4177Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4178the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4179an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4180
4181@smallexample
4182 foo = 1000;
4183@end smallexample
4184
4185creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4186the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4187address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4188linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4189access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4190
4191Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4192you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4193use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4194section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4195linker script contains these declarations:
4196
4197@smallexample
4198@group
4199 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 4200 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
4201 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4202@end group
4203@end smallexample
4204
4205Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4206
4207@smallexample
4208@group
4209 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 4210
73ae6183
NC
4211 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4212@end group
4213@end smallexample
4214
4215Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
4216Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4217arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4218
4219@smallexample
4220@group
4221 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4222
4223 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4224@end group
4225@end smallexample
4226
4227Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4228operators.
73ae6183 4229
252b5132 4230@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 4231@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
4232@kindex SECTIONS
4233The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4234into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4235
4236The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4237@smallexample
4238SECTIONS
4239@{
4240 @var{sections-command}
4241 @var{sections-command}
4242 @dots{}
4243@}
4244@end smallexample
4245
4246Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4247
4248@itemize @bullet
4249@item
4250an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4251@item
4252a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4253@item
4254an output section description
4255@item
4256an overlay description
4257@end itemize
4258
4259The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4260@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4261those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4262understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4263the layout of the output file.
4264
4265Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4266below.
4267
4268If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4269linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4270section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4271input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4272example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4273in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4274
4275@menu
4276* Output Section Description:: Output section description
4277* Output Section Name:: Output section name
4278* Output Section Address:: Output section address
4279* Input Section:: Input section description
4280* Output Section Data:: Output section data
4281* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4282* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4283* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4284* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4285@end menu
4286
4287@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 4288@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
4289The full description of an output section looks like this:
4290@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4291@group
7e7d5768 4292@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4293 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4294 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4295 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4296 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4297 @{
4298 @var{output-section-command}
4299 @var{output-section-command}
4300 @dots{}
abc9061b 4301 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4302@end group
4303@end smallexample
4304
4305Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4306
4307The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4308name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4309The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4310the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4311The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4312
4313Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4314
4315@itemize @bullet
4316@item
4317a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4318@item
4319an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4320@item
4321data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4322@item
4323a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4324@end itemize
4325
4326@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4327@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4328@cindex name, section
4329@cindex section name
4330The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4331meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4332support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4333must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4334example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4335output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4336names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4337quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4338characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4339commas must be quoted.
4340
4341The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4342Discarding}.
4343
4344@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4345@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4346@cindex address, section
4347@cindex section address
4348The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4349address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4350is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4351
4352If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4353section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4354to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4355alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4356contained within the output section.
4357
4358The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4359
4360@itemize @bullet
4361@item
4362If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4363is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4364in that region.
4365
4366@item
4367If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4368regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4369section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4370be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4371
4372@item
4373If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4374the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4375counter.
4376@end itemize
4377
4378@noindent
4379For example:
4380
252b5132
RH
4381@smallexample
4382.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4383@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4384
252b5132
RH
4385@noindent
4386and
ea5cae92 4387
252b5132
RH
4388@smallexample
4389.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4390@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4391
252b5132
RH
4392@noindent
4393are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4394@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4395counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4396counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4397input sections.
252b5132
RH
4398
4399The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4400For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4401so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4402do something like this:
4403@smallexample
4404.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4405@end smallexample
4406@noindent
4407This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4408aligned upward to the specified value.
4409
4410Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4411location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4412sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4413
4414@node Input Section
36f63dca 4415@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4416@cindex input sections
4417@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4418The most common output section command is an input section description.
4419
4420The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4421You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4422in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4423map the input files into your memory layout.
4424
4425@menu
4426* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4427* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4428* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4429* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4430* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4431@end menu
4432
4433@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4434@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4435@cindex input section basics
4436An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4437by a list of section names in parentheses.
4438
4439The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4440describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4441
4442The most common input section description is to include all input
4443sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4444include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4445@smallexample
4446*(.text)
4447@end smallexample
4448@noindent
18625d54 4449Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
8f1732fc 4450@cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
18625d54
CM
4451of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4452match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4453example:
252b5132 4454@smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4455EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4456@end smallexample
4457@noindent
4458will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4459and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4460placed inside the section list, for example:
4461@smallexample
b4346c09 4462*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4463@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4464@noindent
4465The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4466two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4467more than one section, as described below.
252b5132
RH
4468
4469There are two ways to include more than one section:
4470@smallexample
4471*(.text .rdata)
4472*(.text) *(.rdata)
4473@end smallexample
4474@noindent
4475The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4476@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4477first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4478they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4479@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4480@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4481
8f1732fc
AB
4482When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4483is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4484immediately following section, for example:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4485@smallexample
4486*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4487@end smallexample
4488@noindent
4489will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4490@file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4491from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4492exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
8f1732fc 4493could be modified to:
a5bf7d4f
AB
4494@smallexample
4495*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4496@end smallexample
8f1732fc
AB
4497@noindent
4498Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4499before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4500all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4501@smallexample
4502EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4503@end smallexample
a5bf7d4f 4504
252b5132
RH
4505You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4506You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4507needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4508@smallexample
4509data.o(.data)
4510@end smallexample
4511
ae17ab41
CM
4512To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4513of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4514
4515Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4516
4517@smallexample
4518@group
4519SECTIONS @{
4520 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4521 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4522@}
4523@end group
4524@end smallexample
4525
4526In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4527input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4528@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4529@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4530whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4531
967928e9
AM
4532You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4533matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4534with no whitespace around the colon.
4535
4536@table @samp
4537@item archive:file
4538matches file within archive
4539@item archive:
4540matches the whole archive
4541@item :file
4542matches file but not one in an archive
4543@end table
4544
4545Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4546wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4547single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4548@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4549within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4550also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4551other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4552from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4553command.
4554
252b5132
RH
4555If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4556the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4557commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4558@smallexample
4559data.o
4560@end smallexample
4561
967928e9
AM
4562When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4563and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4564characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4565name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4566did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4567though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4568@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4569the archive search path.
4570
4571@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4572@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4573@cindex input section wildcards
4574@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4575@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4576@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4577In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4578name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4579
4580The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4581pattern for the file name.
4582
4583The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4584
4585@table @samp
4586@item *
4587matches any number of characters
4588@item ?
4589matches any single character
4590@item [@var{chars}]
4591matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4592character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4593@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4594@item \
4595quotes the following character
4596@end table
4597
4598When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4599will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4600Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4601exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4602@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4603a @samp{/} character.
4604
4605File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4606specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4607does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4608
4609If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4610appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4611will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4612sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4613@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4614@smallexample
4615.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4616.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4617@end smallexample
4618
bcaa7b3e 4619@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4620Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4621in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4622this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4623pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4624@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4625into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4626
bcaa7b3e
L
4627@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4628@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4629difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4630descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4631Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4632reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4633
02ecc8e9
L
4634@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4635@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4636difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4637ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4638encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4639
bcaa7b3e
L
4640@cindex SORT
4641@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4642
4643When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4644can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4645
4646@enumerate
4647@item
4648@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4649It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4650sections have the same name.
4651@item
4652@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4653It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4654sections have the same alignment.
4655@item
c0065db7 4656@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4657treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4658@item
4659@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4660is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4661@item
4662All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4663@end enumerate
4664
a05a5b64 4665When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
bcaa7b3e 4666section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
a05a5b64 4667takes precedence over the command-line option.
bcaa7b3e
L
4668
4669If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
a05a5b64 4670command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
bcaa7b3e
L
4671treated as nested sorting command.
4672
4673@enumerate
4674@item
4675@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4676@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4677@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4678@item
4679@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4680@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4681@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4682@end enumerate
4683
4684If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
a05a5b64 4685command-line option will be ignored.
bcaa7b3e 4686
eda680f8 4687@cindex SORT_NONE
a05a5b64 4688@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
eda680f8
L
4689section sorting option.
4690
252b5132
RH
4691If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4692@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4693precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4694
4695This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4696files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4697sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4698The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4699with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4700linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4701@smallexample
4702@group
4703SECTIONS @{
4704 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4705 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4706 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4707 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4708@}
4709@end group
4710@end smallexample
4711
4712@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4713@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4714@cindex common symbol placement
4715@cindex uninitialized data placement
4716A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4717file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4718linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4719named @samp{COMMON}.
4720
4721You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4722other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4723particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4724input files are placed in another section.
4725
4726In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4727@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4728@smallexample
4729.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4730@end smallexample
4731
4732@cindex scommon section
4733@cindex small common symbols
4734Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4735example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4736symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4737different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4738the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4739symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4740to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4741locations.
4742
4743@cindex [COMMON]
4744You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4745notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4746@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4747
4748@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4749@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4750@cindex KEEP
4751@cindex garbage collection
4752When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4753it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4754This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4755with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4756@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4757
4758@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4759@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4760The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4761to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4762start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4763@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4764follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4765@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4766@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4767All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4768files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4769
4770@smallexample
4771@group
4772SECTIONS @{
4773 outputa 0x10000 :
4774 @{
4775 all.o
4776 foo.o (.input1)
4777 @}
36f63dca
NC
4778@end group
4779@group
252b5132
RH
4780 outputb :
4781 @{
4782 foo.o (.input2)
4783 foo1.o (.input1)
4784 @}
36f63dca
NC
4785@end group
4786@group
252b5132
RH
4787 outputc :
4788 @{
4789 *(.input1)
4790 *(.input2)
4791 @}
4792@}
4793@end group
a1ab1d2a 4794@end smallexample
252b5132 4795
cbd0eecf
L
4796If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4797and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4798automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4799__stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4800indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4801respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4802C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4803
252b5132 4804@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4805@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4806@cindex data
4807@cindex section data
4808@cindex output section data
4809@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4810@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4811@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4812@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4813@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4814You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4815@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4816an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4817parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4818value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4819counter.
4820
4821The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4822store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4823bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4824stored.
4825
4826For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4827of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4828@smallexample
4829BYTE(1)
4830LONG(addr)
4831@end smallexample
4832
4833When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4834same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4835target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4836@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4837@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4838
4839If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4840which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4841When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4842true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4843endianness of the first input object file.
4844
36f63dca 4845Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4846between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4847@smallexample
4848SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4849@end smallexample
4850whereas this will work:
4851@smallexample
4852SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4853@end smallexample
4854
252b5132
RH
4855@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4856@cindex holes, filling
4857@cindex unspecified memory
4858You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4859current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4860otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4861gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4862with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4863necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4864point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4865than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4866different parts of an output section.
4867
4868This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4869value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4870@smallexample
563e308f 4871FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4872@end smallexample
4873
4874The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4875section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4876part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4877entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4878precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4879expression.
252b5132
RH
4880
4881@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4882@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4883There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4884commands.
4885
4886@table @code
4887@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4888@cindex input filename symbols
4889@cindex filename symbols
4890@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4891The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4892The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4893file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4894the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4895
4896This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4897normally used for any other object file format.
4898
4899@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4900@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4901@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4902@item CONSTRUCTORS
4903When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4904unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4905destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4906arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4907automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4908For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4909linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4910@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4911ignored for other object file formats.
4912
4913The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4914constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4915Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4916the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4917first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4918of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4919compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4920formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4921@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4922the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4923destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4924@code{exit}.
4925
4926For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4927arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4928addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4929and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4930linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4931runtime code expects to see.
4932
4933@smallexample
4934 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4935 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4936 *(.ctors)
4937 LONG(0)
4938 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4939 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4940 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4941 *(.dtors)
4942 LONG(0)
4943 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4944@end smallexample
4945
4946If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4947which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4948are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4949are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4950command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4951@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4952@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4953@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4954
4955Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4956and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4957need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4958scripts.
4959
4960@end table
4961
4962@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4963@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4964@cindex discarding sections
4965@cindex sections, discarding
4966@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4967The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4968This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4969may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4970@smallexample
49c13adb 4971.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4972@end smallexample
4973@noindent
4974will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4975@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4976sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4977space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4978too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4979space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4980@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4981@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4982This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4983
a0976ea4 4984The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4985on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4986symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4987the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4988section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4989
4990@cindex /DISCARD/
4991The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4992input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4993section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4994
4995@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4996@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4997@cindex output section attributes
4998We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4999like this:
0c71d759 5000
252b5132 5001@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 5002@group
7e7d5768 5003@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 5004 [AT(@var{lma})]
3bbec4bd 5005 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
5006 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5007 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
5008 @{
5009 @var{output-section-command}
5010 @var{output-section-command}
5011 @dots{}
562d3460 5012 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
5013@end group
5014@end smallexample
0c71d759 5015
252b5132
RH
5016We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5017@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5018remaining section attributes.
5019
a1ab1d2a 5020@menu
252b5132
RH
5021* Output Section Type:: Output section type
5022* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 5023* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 5024* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 5025* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
5026* Output Section Region:: Output section region
5027* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5028* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5029@end menu
5030
5031@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 5032@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
5033Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5034parentheses. The following types are defined:
5035
5036@table @code
5037@item NOLOAD
5038The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5039loaded into memory when the program is run.
5040@item DSECT
5041@itemx COPY
5042@itemx INFO
5043@itemx OVERLAY
5044These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5045rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5046marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5047section when the program is run.
5048@end table
5049
5050@kindex NOLOAD
5051@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5052@cindex loading, preventing
5053The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5054the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5055the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5056@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 5057need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
5058@smallexample
5059@group
5060SECTIONS @{
5061 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5062 @dots{}
5063@}
5064@end group
5065@end smallexample
5066
5067@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 5068@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 5069@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
5070@kindex AT(@var{lma})
5071@cindex load address
5072@cindex section load address
5073Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
5074@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5075@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5076specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5077address is optional.
6bdafbeb 5078
ea5cae92
NC
5079The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5080specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5081takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5082load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5083region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
5084
5085If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
5086section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5087load address:
5088
5089@itemize @bullet
5090@item
5091If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5092the LMA address as well.
5093
5094@item
5095If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5096
5097@item
5098Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5099with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5100section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5101VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5102the last section in the located region.
5103
5104@item
5105If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5106that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5107
5108@item
5109If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5110section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5111@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5112
5113@cindex ROM initialized data
5114@cindex initialized data in ROM
5115This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5116example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5117called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5118@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5119even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5120uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5121defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5122counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5123
5124@smallexample
5125@group
5126SECTIONS
5127 @{
5128 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 5129 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
5130 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5131 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5132 .bss 0x3000 :
5133 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5134@}
5135@end group
5136@end smallexample
5137
5138The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5139this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5140the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5141how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5142script.
5143
5144@smallexample
5145@group
5146extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5147char *src = &_etext;
5148char *dst = &_data;
5149
ea5cae92
NC
5150/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5151while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 5152 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 5153
ea5cae92 5154/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
5155for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5156 *dst = 0;
5157@end group
5158@end smallexample
5159
bbf115d3
L
5160@node Forced Output Alignment
5161@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5162@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5163@cindex forcing output section alignment
5164@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 5165You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
5166alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5167intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 5168
7e7d5768
AM
5169@node Forced Input Alignment
5170@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5171@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5172@cindex forcing input section alignment
5173@cindex input section alignment
5174You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5175SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5176sections, whether larger or smaller.
5177
0c71d759
NC
5178@node Output Section Constraint
5179@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5180@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5181@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5182@cindex constraints on output sections
5183You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5184of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5185read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5186@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5187
252b5132 5188@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 5189@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
5190@kindex >@var{region}
5191@cindex section, assigning to memory region
5192@cindex memory regions and sections
5193You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5194using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5195
5196Here is a simple example:
5197@smallexample
5198@group
5199MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5200SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5201@end group
5202@end smallexample
5203
5204@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 5205@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
5206@kindex :@var{phdr}
5207@cindex section, assigning to program header
5208@cindex program headers and sections
5209You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5210using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5211one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5212assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5213@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5214linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5215
5216Here is a simple example:
5217@smallexample
5218@group
5219PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5220SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5221@end group
5222@end smallexample
5223
5224@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 5225@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
5226@kindex =@var{fillexp}
5227@cindex section fill pattern
5228@cindex fill pattern, entire section
5229You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5230@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5231(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5232within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
5233alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5234necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 5235of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
5236an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5237fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 5238other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
5239pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5240expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
5241
5242You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 5243output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
5244
5245Here is a simple example:
5246@smallexample
5247@group
563e308f 5248SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
5249@end group
5250@end smallexample
5251
5252@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 5253@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
5254@kindex OVERLAY
5255@cindex overlays
5256An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5257are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5258the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5259copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5260required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5261can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5262than another.
5263
5264Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5265@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5266output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5267command is as follows:
5268@smallexample
5269@group
5270OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5271 @{
5272 @var{secname1}
5273 @{
5274 @var{output-section-command}
5275 @var{output-section-command}
5276 @dots{}
5277 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5278 @var{secname2}
5279 @{
5280 @var{output-section-command}
5281 @var{output-section-command}
5282 @dots{}
5283 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5284 @dots{}
abc9061b 5285 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
5286@end group
5287@end smallexample
5288
5289Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5290section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5291section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 5292those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
5293except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5294sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5295
abc9061b
CC
5296The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5297the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5298
252b5132
RH
5299The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5300addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5301memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5302whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5303and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5304and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5305
56dd11f0
NC
5306If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5307references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5308the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5309sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5310@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
5311
5312For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 5313provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
5314defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5315@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5316the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5317within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5318symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5319
5320At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5321the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5322
5323Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5324@code{SECTIONS} construct.
5325@smallexample
5326@group
5327 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5328 @{
5329 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5330 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5331 @}
5332@end group
5333@end smallexample
5334@noindent
5335This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5336address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5337@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5338following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5339@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5340@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5341
5342C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5343like the following.
5344
5345@smallexample
5346@group
5347 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5348 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5349 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5350@end group
5351@end smallexample
5352
5353Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5354everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5355example could have been written identically as follows.
5356
5357@smallexample
5358@group
5359 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5360 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5361 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5362 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5363 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5364 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5365 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5366@end group
5367@end smallexample
5368
5369@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5370@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5371@kindex MEMORY
5372@cindex memory regions
5373@cindex regions of memory
5374@cindex allocating memory
5375@cindex discontinuous memory
5376The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5377memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5378
5379The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5380memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5381may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5382can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5383set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5384regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5385around to fit into the available regions.
5386
127fcdff
AB
5387A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5388however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5389specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5390@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5391@smallexample
5392@group
a1ab1d2a 5393MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5394 @{
5395 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5396 @dots{}
5397 @}
5398@end group
5399@end smallexample
5400
5401The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5402region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5403Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5404with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5405must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5406add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5407command.
252b5132
RH
5408
5409@cindex memory region attributes
5410The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5411whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5412not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5413@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5414section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5415the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5416them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5417
5418The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5419@table @samp
5420@item R
5421Read-only section
5422@item W
5423Read/write section
5424@item X
5425Executable section
5426@item A
5427Allocatable section
5428@item I
5429Initialized section
5430@item L
5431Same as @samp{I}
5432@item !
c09e9a8c 5433Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5434@end table
5435
81c688d5 5436If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
252b5132 5437@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
81c688d5
NC
5438attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5439unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5440not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5441string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5442or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5443the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
252b5132
RH
5444
5445@kindex ORIGIN =
5446@kindex o =
5447@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5448The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5449the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5450cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5451abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5452@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5453
5454@kindex LENGTH =
5455@kindex len =
5456@kindex l =
5457The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5458region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5459be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5460@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5461
5462In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5463available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5464and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5465linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5466is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5467or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5468explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5469region.
5470
5471@smallexample
5472@group
a1ab1d2a 5473MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5474 @{
5475 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5476 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5477 @}
5478@end group
5479@end smallexample
5480
5481Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5482specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5483@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5484a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5485output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5486was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5487the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5488output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5489region, the linker will issue an error message.
5490
3ec57632 5491It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5492expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5493@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5494
5495@smallexample
5496@group
c0065db7 5497 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5498@end group
5499@end smallexample
5500
252b5132
RH
5501@node PHDRS
5502@section PHDRS Command
5503@kindex PHDRS
5504@cindex program headers
5505@cindex ELF program headers
5506@cindex program segments
5507@cindex segments, ELF
5508The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5509@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5510loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5511program with the @samp{-p} option.
5512
5513When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5514reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5515program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5516This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5517interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5518
5519The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5520in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5521precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5522the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5523not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5524
5525The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5526generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5527ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5528
5529This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5530@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5531
5532@smallexample
5533@group
5534PHDRS
5535@{
5536 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5537 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5538@}
5539@end group
5540@end smallexample
5541
5542The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5543of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5544header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5545with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5546must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5547is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5548
5549Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5550system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5551specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5552sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5553attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5554Section Phdr}.
5555
5556It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5557merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5558repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5559contain the section.
5560
5561If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5562then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5563not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5564convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5565placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5566default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5567segment at all.
5568
5569@kindex FILEHDR
5570@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5571You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5572the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5573The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5574file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5575include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5576segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5577these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5578
5579The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5580value of the keyword.
5581
5582@table @asis
5583@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5584Indicates an unused program header.
5585
5586@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5587Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5588the file.
5589
5590@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5591Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5592
5593@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5594Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5595found.
5596
5597@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5598Indicates a segment holding note information.
5599
5600@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5601A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5602ABI.
5603
5604@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5605Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5606
1a9ccd70
NC
5607@item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5608Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5609
252b5132
RH
5610@item @var{expression}
5611An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5612be used for types not defined above.
5613@end table
5614
5615You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5616in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5617@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5618Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5619output section attribute.
5620
5621The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5622which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5623explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5624an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5625header.
5626
5627Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5628headers used on a native ELF system.
5629
5630@example
5631@group
5632PHDRS
5633@{
5634 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5635 interp PT_INTERP ;
5636 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5637 data PT_LOAD ;
5638 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5639@}
5640
5641SECTIONS
5642@{
5643 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5644 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5645 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5646 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5647 @dots{}
5648 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5649 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5650 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5651 @dots{}
5652@}
5653@end group
5654@end example
5655
5656@node VERSION
5657@section VERSION Command
5658@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5659@cindex symbol versions
5660@cindex version script
5661@cindex versions of symbols
5662The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5663only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5664symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5665a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5666shared library.
5667
5668You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5669you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5670also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5671
5672The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5673@smallexample
5674VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5675@end smallexample
5676
5677The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5678Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5679version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5680version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5681version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5682scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5683library.
5684
5685The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5686examples.
5687
5688@smallexample
5689VERS_1.1 @{
5690 global:
5691 foo1;
5692 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5693 old*;
5694 original*;
5695 new*;
252b5132
RH
5696@};
5697
5698VERS_1.2 @{
5699 foo2;
5700@} VERS_1.1;
5701
5702VERS_2.0 @{
5703 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5704 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5705 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5706 "f(int, double)";
5707 @};
252b5132
RH
5708@} VERS_1.2;
5709@end smallexample
5710
5711This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5712version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5713The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5714a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5715of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5716symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5717is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5718in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5719However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5720name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5721
5722Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5723depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5724to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5725
5726Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5727depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5728and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5729
5730When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5731specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5732unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5733unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5734somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5735wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5736wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5737set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5738ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5739
5740The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5741they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5742could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5743However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5744
0f6bf451 5745Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5746in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5747symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5748won't.
5749
5750@smallexample
7c9c73be 5751@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5752@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5753
252b5132
RH
5754When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5755symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5756requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5757shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5758loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5759linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5760application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5761way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5762all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5763search for each symbol reference.
5764
5765The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5766doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5767that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5768functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5769the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5770required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5771that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5772versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5773the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5774
5775There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5776first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5777source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5778script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5779maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5780@smallexample
5781__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5782@end smallexample
5783@noindent
5784in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5785be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5786The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5787@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5788takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5789
5790The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5791function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5792an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5793version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5794linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5795
5796To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5797source file. Here is an example:
5798
5799@smallexample
5800__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5801__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5802__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5803__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5804@end smallexample
5805
5806In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5807unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5808example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5809@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5810
5811When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5812some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5813this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5814@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5815declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5816you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5817
5818If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5819within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5820(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5821specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5822
cb840a31
L
5823You can also specify the language in the version script:
5824
5825@smallexample
5826VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5827@end smallexample
5828
c0065db7 5829The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5830The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5831demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5832patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5833@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5834
86043bbb
MM
5835Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5836described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5837or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5838the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5839whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5840cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5841might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5842should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5843expect when you upgrade.
5844
252b5132
RH
5845@node Expressions
5846@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5847@cindex expressions
5848@cindex arithmetic
5849The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5850that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5851expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5852host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5853
5854You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5855
5856The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5857expressions.
5858
5859@menu
5860* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5861* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5862* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5863* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5864* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5865* Operators:: Operators
5866* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5867* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5868* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5869@end menu
5870
5871@node Constants
5872@subsection Constants
5873@cindex integer notation
5874@cindex constants in linker scripts
5875All constants are integers.
5876
5877As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5878octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5879hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5880@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5881@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5882value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5883
5884@cindex scaled integers
5885@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5886@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5887@cindex suffixes for integers
5888@cindex integer suffixes
5889In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5890constant by
5891@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5892@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5893@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5894@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5895@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5896@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5897@tex
5898${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5899@end tex
5900@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5901respectively. For example, the following
5902all refer to the same quantity:
5903
252b5132 5904@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5905_fourk_1 = 4K;
5906_fourk_2 = 4096;
5907_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5908_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5909@end smallexample
5910
8a308ae8
NC
5911Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5912conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5913
0c71d759
NC
5914@node Symbolic Constants
5915@subsection Symbolic Constants
5916@cindex symbolic constants
5917@kindex CONSTANT
a094d01f 5918It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
0c71d759
NC
5919the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5920
5921@table @code
5922@item MAXPAGESIZE
5923@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5924The target's maximum page size.
5925
5926@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5927@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5928The target's default page size.
5929@end table
5930
5931So for example:
5932
5933@smallexample
9d5777a3 5934 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5935@end smallexample
5936
5937will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5938supported by the target.
5939
252b5132
RH
5940@node Symbols
5941@subsection Symbol Names
5942@cindex symbol names
5943@cindex names
5944@cindex quoted symbol names
5945@kindex "
5946Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5947and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5948Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5949specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5950keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5951@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5952"SECTION" = 9;
5953"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5954@end smallexample
5955
5956Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5957to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5958whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5959
ecca9871
L
5960@node Orphan Sections
5961@subsection Orphan Sections
5962@cindex orphan
5963Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5964are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5965script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
a87ded7b
AB
5966output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5967in which to place the orphaned input section.
5968
5969If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5970an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5971placed at the end of that output section.
5972
5973If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5974sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5975name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5976orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5977one new output section.
5978
5979If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5980then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
e299b355
AM
5981in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5982linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5983attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5984sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5985support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
ecca9871 5986
a05a5b64
TP
5987The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5988(@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
c005eb9e
AB
5989output sections an orphan is placed in.
5990
252b5132
RH
5991@node Location Counter
5992@subsection The Location Counter
5993@kindex .
5994@cindex dot
5995@cindex location counter
5996@cindex current output location
5997The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5998current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5999location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6000within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6001anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6002
6003@cindex holes
6004Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6005moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
6006location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6007and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6008doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
6009
6010@smallexample
6011SECTIONS
6012@{
6013 output :
6014 @{
6015 file1(.text)
6016 . = . + 1000;
6017 file2(.text)
6018 . += 1000;
6019 file3(.text)
563e308f 6020 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
6021@}
6022@end smallexample
6023@noindent
6024In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6025located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6026followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6027@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 6028@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
6029specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6030
5c6bbab8
NC
6031@cindex dot inside sections
6032Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6033current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 6034statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
6035absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6036however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6037not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6038
6039@smallexample
6040SECTIONS
6041@{
6042 . = 0x100
6043 .text: @{
6044 *(.text)
6045 . = 0x200
6046 @}
6047 . = 0x500
6048 .data: @{
6049 *(.data)
6050 . += 0x600
6051 @}
6052@}
6053@end smallexample
6054
6055The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6056and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6057the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6058much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6059move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6060and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6061the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6062the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6063
b5666f2f
AM
6064@cindex dot outside sections
6065Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6066output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6067needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6068
6069@smallexample
6070SECTIONS
6071@{
6072 start_of_text = . ;
6073 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6074 end_of_text = . ;
6075
6076 start_of_data = . ;
6077 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6078 end_of_data = . ;
6079@}
6080@end smallexample
6081
6082If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6083not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6084between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6085should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6086blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6087the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6088sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6089statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6090special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6091place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6092as follows:
6093
6094@smallexample
6095SECTIONS
6096@{
6097 start_of_text = . ;
6098 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6099 end_of_text = . ;
6100
6101 start_of_data = . ;
6102 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6103 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6104 end_of_data = . ;
6105@}
6106@end smallexample
6107
6108This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6109@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6110placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6111assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6112a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6113section. So you could write:
6114
6115@smallexample
6116SECTIONS
6117@{
6118 start_of_text = . ;
6119 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6120 end_of_text = . ;
6121
6122 . = . ;
6123 start_of_data = . ;
6124 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6125 end_of_data = . ;
6126@}
6127@end smallexample
6128
6129Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6130@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6131
252b5132
RH
6132@need 2000
6133@node Operators
6134@subsection Operators
6135@cindex operators for arithmetic
6136@cindex arithmetic operators
6137@cindex precedence in expressions
6138The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6139the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6140@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6141@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6142@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6143@smallexample
6144precedence associativity Operators Notes
6145(highest)
61461 left ! - ~ (1)
61472 left * / %
61483 left + -
61494 left >> <<
61505 left == != > < <= >=
61516 left &
61527 left |
61538 left &&
61549 left ||
615510 right ? :
615611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6157(lowest)
6158@end smallexample
6159Notes:
a1ab1d2a 6160(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
6161(2) @xref{Assignments}.
6162@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 6163@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
6164@tex
6165\vskip \baselineskip
6166%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6167\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6168\hrule
6169\halign
6170{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6171height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6172&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6173height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6174\noalign{\hrule}
6175height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6176&highest&&&&&\cr
6177% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 6178&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
6179&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6180&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6181&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6182&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6183&6&&left&&\&&\cr
6184&7&&left&&|&\cr
6185&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6186&9&&left&&||&\cr
6187&10&&right&&? :&\cr
6188&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6189&lowest&&&&&\cr
6190height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6191\hrule}
6192@end tex
6193@iftex
6194{
6195@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6196@dag@quad Prefix operators.
6197@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6198}
6199@end iftex
6200@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6201
6202@node Evaluation
6203@subsection Evaluation
6204@cindex lazy evaluation
6205@cindex expression evaluation order
6206The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6207an expression when absolutely necessary.
6208
6209The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6210address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6211regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6212as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6213
6214However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6215until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6216other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6217for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6218
6219The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6220assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6221allocation.
6222
6223Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6224@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6225
6226If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6227available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6228following
6229@smallexample
6230@group
6231SECTIONS
6232 @{
a1ab1d2a 6233 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
6234 @{ *(.text) @}
6235 @}
6236@end group
6237@end smallexample
6238@noindent
6239will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6240address}.
6241
6242@node Expression Section
6243@subsection The Section of an Expression
6244@cindex expression sections
6245@cindex absolute expressions
6246@cindex relative expressions
6247@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6248@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6249@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
6250Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6251relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6252using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6253value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6254symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6255operations.
6256
abf4be64
AM
6257Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6258section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6259address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6260@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6261functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
6262One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6263(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
6264differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6265versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6266section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6267Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
6268absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6269given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6270everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
6271
6272In the following simple example,
252b5132 6273
7542af2a
AM
6274@smallexample
6275@group
6276SECTIONS
6277 @{
6278 . = 0x100;
6279 __executable_start = 0x100;
6280 .data :
6281 @{
6282 . = 0x10;
6283 __data_start = 0x10;
6284 *(.data)
6285 @}
6286 @dots{}
6287 @}
6288@end group
6289@end smallexample
252b5132 6290
7542af2a
AM
6291both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6292address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6293@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6294section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 6295
5c3049d2
AM
6296For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6297addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
6298
6299@itemize @bullet
6300@item
c05f749e
AM
6301Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6302operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6303absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6304@item
7542af2a
AM
6305Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6306relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6307and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6308@item
c05f749e
AM
6309Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6310in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6311address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6312before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
6313@end itemize
6314
6315The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6316
6317@itemize @bullet
6318@item
6319An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6320@item
6321The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6322@item
9bc8bb33 6323The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 6324relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
94b41882
AM
6325(after above conversions) is also a number when
6326@code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6327but an absolute address otherwise.
9bc8bb33
AM
6328@item
6329The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6330relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6331section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
6332@item
6333The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6334conversions) is an absolute address.
6335@end itemize
252b5132
RH
6336
6337You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6338to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6339create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6340section @samp{.data}:
6341@smallexample
6342SECTIONS
6343 @{
6344 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6345 @}
6346@end smallexample
6347@noindent
6348If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6349@samp{.data} section.
6350
7542af2a
AM
6351Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6352particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6353
252b5132
RH
6354@node Builtin Functions
6355@subsection Builtin Functions
6356@cindex functions in expressions
6357The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6358use in linker script expressions.
6359
6360@table @code
6361@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6362@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6363@cindex expression, absolute
6364Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6365of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6366value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6367normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6368
6369@item ADDR(@var{section})
6370@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6371@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6372Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6373script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6374the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6375@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6376@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6377the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6378@smallexample
6379@group
6380SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6381 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6382 @{
252b5132
RH
6383 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6384 @dots{}
6385 @}
6386 .output :
6387 @{
6388 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6389 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6390 @}
6391@dots{} @}
6392@end group
6393@end smallexample
6394
876f4090
NS
6395@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6396@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6397@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6398@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6399@cindex round up location counter
6400@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6401@cindex round up expression
6402@cindex align expression
6403Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6404to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6405doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6406arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6407expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6408equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6409
6410Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6411next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6412variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6413input sections:
252b5132
RH
6414@smallexample
6415@group
6416SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6417 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6418 *(.data)
6419 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6420 @}
6421@dots{} @}
6422@end group
6423@end smallexample
6424@noindent
6425The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6426a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6427a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6428of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6429
6430The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6431
362c1d1a
NS
6432@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6433@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6434@cindex section alignment
6435Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6436been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6437evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6438the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6439value in that section.
6440@smallexample
6441@group
6442SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6443 .output @{
6444 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6445 @dots{}
6446 @}
6447@dots{} @}
6448@end group
6449@end smallexample
6450
252b5132
RH
6451@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6452@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6453This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6454scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6455section.
6456
2d20f7bf
JJ
6457@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6458@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6459This is equivalent to either
6460@smallexample
6461(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6462@end smallexample
6463or
6464@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6465(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6466 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6467@end smallexample
6468@noindent
6469depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6470for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6471@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6472If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6473memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6474bytes in the on-disk file.
6475
6476This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6477any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6478@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
def5c83c
AM
6479be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6480running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6481that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6482page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
2d20f7bf
JJ
6483
6484@noindent
6485Example:
6486@smallexample
6487 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6488@end smallexample
6489
6490@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6491@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6492This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6493evaluation purposes.
6494
6495@smallexample
6496 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6497@end smallexample
6498
a4f5ad88
JJ
6499@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6500@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6501This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6502@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6503When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6504does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
def5c83c
AM
6505@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6506argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6507script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6508@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6509padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6510section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6511
6512@smallexample
6513 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6514@end smallexample
6515
252b5132
RH
6516@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6517@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6518@cindex symbol defaults
6519Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6520defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6521return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6522default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6523shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6524the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6525existed, its value is preserved:
6526
6527@smallexample
6528@group
6529SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6530 .text : @{
6531 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6532 @dots{}
6533 @}
6534 @dots{}
6535@}
6536@end group
6537@end smallexample
6538
3ec57632
NC
6539@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6540@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6541Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6542
252b5132
RH
6543@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6544@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6545@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6546Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6547Section LMA}).
6548
2e53f7d6
NC
6549@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6550@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6551Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6552@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6553
252b5132
RH
6554@kindex MAX
6555@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6556Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6557
6558@kindex MIN
6559@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6560Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6561
6562@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6563@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6564@cindex unallocated address, next
6565Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6566This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6567use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6568output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6569
3ec57632
NC
6570@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6571@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6572Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6573
ba916c8a
MM
6574@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6575@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6576Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6577value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6578@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6579will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6580can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6581``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6582name.
6583
252b5132
RH
6584@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6585@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6586@cindex section size
6587Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6588been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6589evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6590@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6591@smallexample
6592@group
6593SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6594 .output @{
6595 .start = . ;
6596 @dots{}
6597 .end = . ;
6598 @}
6599 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6600 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6601@dots{} @}
6602@end group
6603@end smallexample
6604
6605@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6606@itemx sizeof_headers
6607@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6608@cindex header size
6609Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6610information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6611this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6612choose, to facilitate paging.
6613
6614@cindex not enough room for program headers
6615@cindex program headers, not enough room
6616When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6617@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6618number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6619addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6620additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6621room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6622the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6623script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6624you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6625command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6626@end table
6627
6628@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6629@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6630@cindex implicit linker scripts
6631If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6632an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6633linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6634linker will report an error.
6635
6636An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6637
6638Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6639assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6640commands.
6641
6642Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6643at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6644read. This can affect archive searching.
6645
6646@ifset GENERIC
6647@node Machine Dependent
6648@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6649
6650@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6651@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6652sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6653functionality are not listed.
6654
6655@menu
36f63dca
NC
6656@ifset H8300
6657* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6658@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6659@ifset M68HC11
6660* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6661@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6662@ifset ARM
6663* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6664@end ifset
6665@ifset HPPA
6666* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6667@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6668@ifset M68K
6669* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6670@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6671@ifset MIPS
6672* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6673@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6674@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6675* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6676@end ifset
2469cfa2 6677@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6678* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6679@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6680@ifset NDS32
6681* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6682@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6683@ifset NIOSII
6684* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6685@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6686@ifset POWERPC
6687* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6688@end ifset
6689@ifset POWERPC64
6690* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6691@end ifset
b4cbbe8f
AK
6692@ifset S/390
6693* S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6694@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6695@ifset SPU
6696* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6697@end ifset
74459f0e 6698@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6699* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6700@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6701@ifset WIN32
6702* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6703@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6704@ifset XTENSA
6705* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6706@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6707@end menu
6708@end ifset
6709
252b5132
RH
6710@ifset H8300
6711@ifclear GENERIC
6712@raisesections
6713@end ifclear
6714
6715@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6716@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6717
6718@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6719For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6720you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6721
6722@table @emph
6723@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6724@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6725@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6726targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6727program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6728respectively.
6729
6730@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6731@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6732@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6733@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6734sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6735page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6736(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6737@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6738top page of memory).
1502569c 6739
81f5558e
NC
6740@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6741indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6742displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6743the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6744@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6745whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6746range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6747
1502569c 6748@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6749@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6750biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6751which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6752page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6753(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6754@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6755the top page of memory).
6756
6757@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6758@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
675932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6760changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6761(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6762@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6763the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6764@end table
6765
6766@ifclear GENERIC
6767@lowersections
6768@end ifclear
6769@end ifset
6770
36f63dca 6771@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6772@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6773@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6774@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6775@node Renesas
6776@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6777
c2dcd04e
NC
6778@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6779H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6780options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6781@end ifset
6782@end ifclear
6783
36f63dca
NC
6784@ifset ARM
6785@ifclear GENERIC
6786@raisesections
6787@end ifclear
6788
93fd0973
SC
6789@ifset M68HC11
6790@ifclear GENERIC
6791@raisesections
6792@end ifclear
6793
6794@node M68HC11/68HC12
6795@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6796
6797@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6798
6799@subsection Linker Relaxation
6800
6801For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6802optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6803
6804@table @emph
6805@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6806@item relaxing address modes
6807@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6808targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6809program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6810respectively.
6811
6812@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6813transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6814page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6815
6816@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6817When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6818of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6819addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6820@code{bset} instructions.
6821
6822@end table
6823
6824@subsection Trampoline Generation
6825
6826@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6827@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6828For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6829call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6830will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6831trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6832case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6833point to the function trampoline.
6834
6835@ifclear GENERIC
6836@lowersections
6837@end ifclear
6838@end ifset
6839
36f63dca 6840@node ARM
3674e28a 6841@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6842
6843@cindex ARM interworking support
6844@kindex --support-old-code
6845For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6846between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6847been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6848line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6849libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
a05a5b64 6850option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
36f63dca
NC
6851given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6852which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6853the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6854non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6855
6856@cindex thumb entry point
6857@cindex entry point, thumb
6858@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6859The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6860@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6861But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6862branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6863executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6864
ce11ba6c
KT
6865@cindex PE import table prefixing
6866@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6867The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6868the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6869element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6870import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6871
e489d0ae
PB
6872@cindex BE8
6873@kindex --be8
6874The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6875executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6876objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6877option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6878little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6879
3674e28a
PB
6880@cindex TARGET1
6881@kindex --target1-rel
6882@kindex --target1-abs
6883The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6884@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6885or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6886and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6887
6888@cindex TARGET2
6889@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6890The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6891@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6892meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6893@table @samp
6894@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6895@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6896@item abs
6897@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6898@item got-rel
6899@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6900@end table
6901
319850b4
JB
6902@cindex FIX_V4BX
6903@kindex --fix-v4bx
6904The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6905specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6906interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6907also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6908
6909In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6910linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6911@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6912
6913In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6914relocations are ignored.
6915
845b51d6
PB
6916@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6917@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6918Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6919relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6920
6921@smallexample
6922TST rM, #1
6923MOVEQ PC, rM
6924BX Rn
6925@end smallexample
6926
6927This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6928and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6929condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6930
33bfe774
JB
6931@cindex USE_BLX
6932@kindex --use-blx
6933The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6934BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6935situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6936code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6937each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6938
6939This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6940specify it if you are using that target.
6941
c6dd86c6
JB
6942@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6943@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6944The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6945bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6946instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6947to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6948the support code can read the intended values.
6949
6950The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6951intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6952and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6953intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6954full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6955you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6956
6957If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6958enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6959@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6960mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6961vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6962@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6963
6964If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6965potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6966such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6967first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6968instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6969the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6970are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6971
2de70689
MGD
6972@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6973@kindex --fix-arm1176
6974@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6975The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6976in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6977are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6978unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6979
9d5777a3 6980Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6981Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6982http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6983
a504d23a
LA
6984@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6985@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6986
6987The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6988workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6989the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6990off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6991the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6992core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6993integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6994VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6995
6996The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6997necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6998
6999The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7000@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7001STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7002linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7003@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7004
7005If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7006potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7007such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7008replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7009branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7010then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7011
7012The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7013the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7014
7015The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7016they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7017there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7018occurs.
7019
7020The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7021PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7022large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7023cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7024occurs.
7025
bf21ed78
MS
7026@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7027@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 7028The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
7029warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7030enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7031linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7032using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7033not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
7034
7035@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7036@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7037The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7038warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7039@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7040linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7041using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 7042
726150b7
NC
7043@cindex PIC_VENEER
7044@kindex --pic-veneer
7045The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7046ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7047is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7048@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7049
7050@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7051@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7052The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7053code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7054perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7055placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
a05a5b64 7056controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
726150b7 7057The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 7058duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
7059group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7060code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7061where they should be placed.
7062
7063The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7064@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 7065placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
7066branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7067placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7068value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7069exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7070A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7071linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7072from the input sections.
7073
7074The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7075@samp{N = +1}.
7076
1a51c1a4
NC
7077Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7078only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7079otherwise.
7080
1db37fe6
YG
7081@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7082@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7083@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7084The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7085
7086The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7087
68fcca92
JW
7088@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7089@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7090@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7091The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7092
7093Please contact ARM for further details.
7094
1db37fe6
YG
7095@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7096@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7097@cindex Merging exidx entries
7098The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7099
7100@kindex --long-plt
7101@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7102The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7103which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7104entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7105
1f56df9d
JW
7106@kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7107@cindex AArch64 rela addend
7108The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7109link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7110
4ba2ef8f
TP
7111@cindex Placement of SG veneers
7112All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
a05a5b64 7113Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
4ba2ef8f
TP
7114@samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7115veneers in memory.
7116
54ddd295
TP
7117@kindex --cmse-implib
7118@cindex Secure gateway import library
7119The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7120specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7121secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7122executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7123
0955507f
TP
7124@kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7125@cindex Input import library
7126The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7127must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7128given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7129in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7130@samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7131library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7132library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7133for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7134specified.
7135
36f63dca
NC
7136@ifclear GENERIC
7137@lowersections
7138@end ifclear
7139@end ifset
7140
7141@ifset HPPA
7142@ifclear GENERIC
7143@raisesections
7144@end ifclear
7145
7146@node HPPA ELF32
7147@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7148@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7149@kindex --multi-subspace
7150When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7151import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7152The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7153stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7154multiple sub-spaces.
7155
7156@cindex HPPA stub grouping
7157@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7158Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7159stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7160@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7161sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7162a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7163the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7164conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7165prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7166A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7167branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7168@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7169@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7170detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7171positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7172
7173Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7174single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7175create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7176large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7177
7178@ifclear GENERIC
7179@lowersections
7180@end ifclear
7181@end ifset
7182
7fb9f789
NC
7183@ifset M68K
7184@ifclear GENERIC
7185@raisesections
7186@end ifclear
7187
7188@node M68K
7189@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7190
7191@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7192@kindex --got=@var{type}
7193The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7194The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7195@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7196the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7197@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7198entries only at non-negative offsets.
7199@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7200entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7201support such GOTs.
7202@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7203output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7204file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7205files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7206
7207@ifclear GENERIC
7208@lowersections
7209@end ifclear
7210@end ifset
7211
833794fc
MR
7212@ifset MIPS
7213@ifclear GENERIC
7214@raisesections
7215@end ifclear
7216
7217@node MIPS
7218@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7219
7220@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7221@kindex --insn32
7222@kindex --no-insn32
7223The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7224microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7225in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7226used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7227or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7228including 16-bit ones where possible.
7229
8b10b0b3
MR
7230@cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7231@kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7232@kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7233The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7234control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7235@samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7236relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7237calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7238relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7239instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7240or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7241the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7242
833794fc
MR
7243@ifclear GENERIC
7244@lowersections
7245@end ifclear
7246@end ifset
7247
36f63dca
NC
7248@ifset MMIX
7249@ifclear GENERIC
7250@raisesections
7251@end ifclear
7252
7253@node MMIX
7254@section @code{ld} and MMIX
7255For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7256@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7257understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7258can translate between the two formats.
7259
7260There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7261Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7262registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7263equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7264@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7265global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7266this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7267symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7268
7a2de473
HPN
7269Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7270@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7271The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7272of a section.
36f63dca
NC
7273
7274Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7275are left out from an mmo file.
7276
7277@ifclear GENERIC
7278@lowersections
7279@end ifclear
7280@end ifset
7281
7282@ifset MSP430
7283@ifclear GENERIC
7284@raisesections
7285@end ifclear
7286
7287@node MSP430
7288@section @code{ld} and MSP430
7289For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7290will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7291just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7292
7293@cindex MSP430 extra sections
7294The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7295
7296@table @code
7297@item @samp{.vectors}
7298Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7299
7300@item @samp{.bootloader}
7301Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7302in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7303
7304@item @samp{.infomem}
7305Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7306this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7307
c0065db7 7308@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
7309This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7310in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7311
7312@item @samp{.noinit}
7313Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7314
c0065db7 7315The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
7316@end table
7317
7ef3addb
JL
7318@table @option
7319@cindex MSP430 Options
7320@kindex --code-region
7321@item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7322This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7323argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7324using this option.
7325
7326@kindex --data-region
7327@item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7328This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7329[either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7330for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7331
7332@kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7333@item --disable-sec-transformation
7334Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7335and @code{--data-region} options.
7336This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7337wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7338not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7339@end table
7340
36f63dca
NC
7341@ifclear GENERIC
7342@lowersections
7343@end ifclear
7344@end ifset
7345
35c08157
KLC
7346@ifset NDS32
7347@ifclear GENERIC
7348@raisesections
7349@end ifclear
7350
7351@node NDS32
7352@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7353@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7354For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7355relaxes objects according to these options.
7356
7357@table @code
7358@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7359Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7360
7361@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7362Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7363
7364@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7365Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7366
7367@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7368Export the EX9 table after linking.
7369
7370@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7371Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7372
7373@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7374Update the existing EX9 table.
7375
7376@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7377Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7378
7379@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7380Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7381
7382@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7383Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7384
7385@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7386Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7387@end table
7388
7389@ifclear GENERIC
7390@lowersections
7391@end ifclear
7392@end ifset
7393
78058a5e
SL
7394@ifset NIOSII
7395@ifclear GENERIC
7396@raisesections
7397@end ifclear
7398
7399@node Nios II
7400@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7401@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7402@kindex --relax on Nios II
7403
7404Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7405transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7406which may result in @command{ld} giving
7407@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7408The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7409trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7410outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7411trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7412be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7413larger than 256MB.
7414
7415The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7416is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7417@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7418locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7419source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7420register as a temporary.
7421
7422Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7423relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7424option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7425
7426@ifclear GENERIC
7427@lowersections
7428@end ifclear
7429@end ifset
7430
2a60a7a8
AM
7431@ifset POWERPC
7432@ifclear GENERIC
7433@raisesections
7434@end ifclear
7435
7436@node PowerPC ELF32
7437@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7438@cindex PowerPC long branches
7439@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7440Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7441displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7442@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7443@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7444the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7445section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7446section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7447@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7448both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7449considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7450
7451@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7452@table @option
7453@cindex PowerPC PLT
7454@kindex --bss-plt
7455@item --bss-plt
7456Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7457generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7458the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7459writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7460@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7461PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7462compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7463BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7464
016687f8
AM
7465@kindex --secure-plt
7466@item --secure-plt
7467@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7468@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7469when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7470layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7471style BSS PLT.
7472
2a60a7a8
AM
7473@cindex PowerPC GOT
7474@kindex --sdata-got
7475@item --sdata-got
7476The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7477sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7478@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7479section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7480@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7481@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7482@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7483@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7484PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7485pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7486GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7487really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7488
7489@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7490@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7491@item --emit-stub-syms
7492This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7493symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7494
7495@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7496@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7497@item --no-tls-optimize
7498PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7499sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7500disable the optimization.
7501@end table
7502
7503@ifclear GENERIC
7504@lowersections
7505@end ifclear
7506@end ifset
7507
7508@ifset POWERPC64
7509@ifclear GENERIC
7510@raisesections
7511@end ifclear
7512
7513@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7514@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7515
7516@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7517@table @option
7518@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7519@kindex --stub-group-size
7520@item --stub-group-size
7521Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7522by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7523@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7524sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7525a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7526the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7527conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7528prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7529A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7530branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7531@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7532@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7533detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7534positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7535
7536Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7537single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7538create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7539large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7540
7541@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7542@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7543@item --emit-stub-syms
7544This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7545symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7546
7547@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7548@kindex --dotsyms
7549@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7550@item --dotsyms
7551@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7552These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7553in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7554function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7555code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7556properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7557to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7558@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7559dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7560feature.
7561
7ae4ea7d
AM
7562@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7563@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7564@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7565@item --save-restore-funcs
7566@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7567These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7568provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7569@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7570function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7571link.
7572
2a60a7a8
AM
7573@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7574@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7575@item --no-tls-optimize
7576PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7577sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7578disable the optimization.
7579
7c9cf415
AM
7580@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7581@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7582@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7583@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7584@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7585These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7586stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7587an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7588@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7589stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7590option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7591Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7592slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7593application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7594normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7595
2a60a7a8
AM
7596@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7597@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7598@item --no-opd-optimize
7599PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7600corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7601the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7602Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7603
7604@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7605@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7606@item --non-overlapping-opd
7607Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7608@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7609the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7610entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7611
7612@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7613@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7614@item --no-toc-optimize
7615PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7616entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7617reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7618marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7619marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7620relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7621unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7622reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7623discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7624reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7625code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7626optimization.
7627
7628@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7629@kindex --no-multi-toc
7630@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7631If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7632@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7633where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7634entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7635total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7636grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7637TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7638calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7639help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
764064K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7641Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7642
7643@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7644@kindex --no-toc-sort
7645@item --no-toc-sort
7646By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7647happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7648placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7649with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7650referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7651@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7652results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7653off this feature.
7654
7655@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7656@kindex --plt-align
7657@kindex --no-plt-align
7658@item --plt-align
7659@itemx --no-plt-align
7660Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
2420fff6
AM
7661aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7662boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7663specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7664specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7665if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7666PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
794e51c0
AM
7667
7668@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7669@kindex --plt-static-chain
7670@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7671@item --plt-static-chain
7672@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7673Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7674chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7675chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7676
7677@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7678@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7679@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7680@item --plt-thread-safe
1be5d8d3 7681@itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
794e51c0
AM
7682With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7683lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7684another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7685order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7686memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7687barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7688looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7689seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7690default behaviour.
8b5f1ed8
AM
7691
7692@cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7693@kindex --plt-localentry
7694@kindex --no-plt-localentry
7695@item --plt-localentry
7696@itemx --no-localentry
7697ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7698ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7699(the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7700Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7701or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7702functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7703in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
d44c746a
AM
7704interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7705including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7706to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7707complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7708care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
2a60a7a8
AM
7709@end table
7710
7711@ifclear GENERIC
7712@lowersections
7713@end ifclear
7714@end ifset
7715
b4cbbe8f
AK
7716@ifset S/390
7717@ifclear GENERIC
7718@raisesections
7719@end ifclear
7720
7721@node S/390 ELF
7722@section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7723
7724@cindex S/390 ELF options
7725@table @option
7726
7727@cindex S/390
7728@kindex --s390-pgste
7729@item --s390-pgste
7730This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7731segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7732binaries marked that way.
7733@end table
7734
7735@ifclear GENERIC
7736@lowersections
7737@end ifclear
7738@end ifset
7739
49fa1e15
AM
7740@ifset SPU
7741@ifclear GENERIC
7742@raisesections
7743@end ifclear
7744
7745@node SPU ELF
7746@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7747
7748@cindex SPU ELF options
7749@table @option
7750
7751@cindex SPU plugins
7752@kindex --plugin
7753@item --plugin
7754This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7755
7756@cindex SPU overlays
7757@kindex --no-overlays
7758@item --no-overlays
7759Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7760regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7761@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7762turns off all this special overlay handling.
7763
7764@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7765@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7766@item --emit-stub-syms
7767This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7768symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7769
7770@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7771@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7772@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7773This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7774function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7775on calls to non-overlay regions.
7776
7777@cindex SPU local store size
7778@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7779@item --local-store=lo:hi
7780@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7781the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7782range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7783
c0065db7 7784@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7785@kindex --stack-analysis
7786@item --stack-analysis
7787SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7788unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7789under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7790@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7791@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7792determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7793for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7794for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7795for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7796find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7797and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7798under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7799dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7800is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7801and calls will be given.
7802
c0065db7 7803@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7804@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7805@item --emit-stack-syms
7806This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7807in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7808These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7809functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7810functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7811such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7812The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7813@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7814@end table
7815
7816@ifclear GENERIC
7817@lowersections
7818@end ifclear
7819@end ifset
7820
36f63dca
NC
7821@ifset TICOFF
7822@ifclear GENERIC
7823@raisesections
7824@end ifclear
7825
7826@node TI COFF
7827@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7828@cindex TI COFF versions
7829@kindex --format=@var{version}
7830The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7831TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7832also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7833format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7834header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7835
7836@ifclear GENERIC
7837@lowersections
7838@end ifclear
7839@end ifset
7840
2ca22b03
NC
7841@ifset WIN32
7842@ifclear GENERIC
7843@raisesections
7844@end ifclear
7845
7846@node WIN32
7847@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7848
c0065db7 7849This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
a05a5b64
TP
7850See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7851command-line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7852
7853@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7854@cindex import libraries
7855@item import libraries
69da35b5 7856The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7857libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7858regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7859archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03 7860support for creating such libraries provided with the
a05a5b64 7861@samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
2ca22b03 7862
c0065db7
RM
7863@item exporting DLL symbols
7864@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7865The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7866
7867@table @emph
7868@item using auto-export functionality
7869@cindex using auto-export functionality
7870By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
a05a5b64 7871which is controlled by the following command-line options:
dc8465bf 7872
0a5d968e
NC
7873@itemize
7874@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7875@item --exclude-symbols
7876@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7877@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7878@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7879@end itemize
7880
09e2aba4
DK
7881When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7882(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7883symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7884often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7885private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7886options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7887exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7888final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7889
7890If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7891command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7892if either of the following are true:
7893
7894@itemize
7895@item A DEF file is used.
7896@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7897@end itemize
dc8465bf 7898
c0065db7
RM
7899@item using a DEF file
7900@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7901Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7902an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7903exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7904name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7905command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7906
7907@example
7908gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7909@end example
7910
0a5d968e
NC
7911Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7912@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7913
dc8465bf
NC
7914Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7915
7916@example
4b5bd4e7 7917LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7918
7919EXPORTS
7920foo
7921bar
7922_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7923another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7924var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7925doo = foo == foo2
7926eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7927@end example
dc8465bf 7928
7fcab871 7929This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7930symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7931alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7932by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7933@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7934@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7935export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7936in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7937symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7938
6b31ad16
DS
7939The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7940name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7941the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7942
b45619c0
NC
7943When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7944library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7945@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7946executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7947
7948With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7949specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7950non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7951
7952If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7953or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7954filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7955
4b5bd4e7
DS
7956The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7957
7958@example
7959EXPORTS
7960 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7961 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7962 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7963@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7964
7965Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7966@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7967@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7968@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7969Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7970@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7971string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7972
7973The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7974
7975@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7976will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7977by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7978linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7979library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7980
7981@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7982The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7983the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7984@code{*_imp__foo}).
7985
7986@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7987well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7988read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7989variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7990the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7991extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7992application will behave unexpectedly.
7993
7994@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7995it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7996symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
de194d85 7997API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
4b5bd4e7 7998the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7999
4b5bd4e7
DS
8000See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8001other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
8002
8003@cindex creating a DEF file
8004While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
a05a5b64 8005with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
0a5d968e
NC
8006
8007@item Using decorations
8008@cindex Using decorations
8009Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8010itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8011declared as:
8012
8013@example
8014__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8015__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8016@end example
8017
8018All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8019any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8020this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8021the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8022
8023Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 8024decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
8025instead:
8026
8027@example
8028__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8029__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8030@end example
8031
c0065db7
RM
8032This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8033when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
8034variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8035code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 8036of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
8037omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8038@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 8039information.
c0065db7 8040@end table
dc8465bf 8041
2ca22b03
NC
8042@cindex automatic data imports
8043@item automatic data imports
8044The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 8045by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 8046compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 8047issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 8048code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 8049c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 8050initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 8051decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 8052platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
8053command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8054The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8055suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8056trigger the feature's use.
8057
c0065db7 8058auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
8059additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8060
c0065db7 8061"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
8062documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8063
c0065db7
RM
8064The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8065occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8066One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
8067below.
8068
8069@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
8070For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8071object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8072offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8073field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8074in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 8075without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 8076The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
8077references.
8078
c0065db7
RM
8079The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8080be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8081themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8082runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8083compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8084support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
8085run without error on an older system.
8086
c0065db7
RM
8087@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8088enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
8089
8090@cindex direct linking to a dll
8091@item direct linking to a dll
8092The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8093including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 8094libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 8095traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
8096libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8097function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8098though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 8099storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 8100tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
8101large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8102
c0065db7 8103Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 8104@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 8105of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
8106perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8107select the dll instead of an import library.
8108
2ca22b03 8109
69da35b5
NC
8110For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8111to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
8112
8113@example
45e948fe
NC
8114libxxx.dll.a
8115xxx.dll.a
8116libxxx.a
8117xxx.lib
f6c4d4b1 8118libxxx.lib
69da35b5 8119cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
8120libxxx.dll
8121xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
8122@end example
8123
69da35b5
NC
8124before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8125
c0065db7
RM
8126(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8127where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8128@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8129file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
8130@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8131
c0065db7
RM
8132Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8133@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
8134was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8135various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8136could coexist on the same machine.
8137
2ca22b03
NC
8138The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8139applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 8140libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
8141
8142@example
8143bin/
8144 cygxxx.dll
8145lib/
8146 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 8147 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
8148@end example
8149
c0065db7
RM
8150Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8151done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
8152
81531. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8154@example
8155gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8156@end example
2ca22b03 8157
69da35b5
NC
8158However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8159(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8160@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8161not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8162
2ca22b03
NC
81632. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8164directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8165should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8166making the app/dll.
8167
8168@example
8169ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 8170@end example
2ca22b03
NC
8171
8172Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8173
8174@example
8175gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 8176@end example
69da35b5
NC
8177
8178This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8179perfectly legal
8180
8181@example
8182bin/
8183 cygxxx-5.dll
8184lib/
c0065db7 8185 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
8186@end example
8187
dc8465bf 8188Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
8189even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8190@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8191
8192Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 8193wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
8194
81951. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8196work with auto-imported data.
8197
dc8465bf
NC
81982. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8199import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8200symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8201for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8202possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 8203
45e948fe
NC
82043. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8205critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8206in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8207stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8208
69da35b5 8209So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
8210true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8211a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8212binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
8213massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8214requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8215will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 8216
c0065db7 8217@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 8218@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
8219@item adding additional names
8220Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
8221A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8222exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8223when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 8224import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 8225
c0065db7 8226@example
dc8465bf
NC
8227LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8228
8229EXPORTS
c0065db7 8230foo
dc8465bf 8231_foo = foo
c0065db7 8232@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8233
8234The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8235
8236Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8237source code using the "weak" attribute:
8238
c0065db7
RM
8239@example
8240void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 8241void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 8242@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8243
8244See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8245symbols.
8246
8247@item renaming symbols
8248Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 8249kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
8250@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8251DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 8252created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 8253
c0065db7 8254@example
dc8465bf
NC
8255LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8256
8257EXPORTS
8258_foo = foo
c0065db7 8259@end example
dc8465bf
NC
8260
8261The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8262@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 8263@end table
dc8465bf 8264
0a5d968e 8265Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
a05a5b64 8266unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
0a5d968e 8267If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
8268@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8269that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8270@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8271renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8272to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8273the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8274In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 8275which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
8276
8277@cindex weak externals
8278@item weak externals
8279The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8280weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8281defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8282are three variants of weak externals:
8283@itemize
8284@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8285called lazy externals.
8286@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8287This form is not presently implemented.
8288@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8289implemented.
8290@end itemize
8291As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8292are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8293uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
8294
8295@cindex aligned common symbols
8296@item aligned common symbols
8297As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8298desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8299the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8300carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8301by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8302tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8303but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8304warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 8305
2ca22b03
NC
8306@end table
8307
8308@ifclear GENERIC
8309@lowersections
8310@end ifclear
8311@end ifset
8312
e0001a05
NC
8313@ifset XTENSA
8314@ifclear GENERIC
8315@raisesections
8316@end ifclear
8317
8318@node Xtensa
8319@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8320
8321@cindex Xtensa processors
8322The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8323@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8324specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8325keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8326example, with the command:
8327
8328@smallexample
8329SECTIONS
8330@{
8331 .text : @{
8332 *(.literal .text)
8333 @}
8334@}
8335@end smallexample
8336
8337@noindent
8338@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8339and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8340literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8341interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8342group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8343files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8344and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 8345
43cd72b9 8346@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 8347@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
8348Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8349provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8350is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8351literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8352will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8353location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8354the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8355unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8356@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8357range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8358
8359For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8360to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8361instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8362instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8363instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8364@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8365hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8366By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8367switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8368density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8369instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8370performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8371linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8372a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8373
8374The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8375control the linker:
8376
8377@cindex Xtensa options
8378@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
8379@item --size-opt
8380When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8381more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8382no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8383alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8384preserve the correctness of the code.
8385@end table
e0001a05
NC
8386
8387@ifclear GENERIC
8388@lowersections
8389@end ifclear
8390@end ifset
8391
252b5132
RH
8392@ifclear SingleFormat
8393@node BFD
8394@chapter BFD
8395
8396@cindex back end
8397@cindex object file management
8398@cindex object formats available
8399@kindex objdump -i
8400The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8401These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8402object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8403format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8404it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8405associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8406object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8407(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8408list all the formats available for your configuration.
8409
8410@cindex BFD requirements
8411@cindex requirements for BFD
8412As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8413several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8414BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8415formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8416been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8417BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8418may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8419
8420One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8421mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8422useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8423conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8424
8425@menu
8426* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8427@end menu
8428
8429@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8430@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8431@cindex opening object files
8432@include bfdsumm.texi
8433@end ifclear
8434
8435@node Reporting Bugs
8436@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8437@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8438@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8439
ff5dcc92 8440Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8441
8442Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8443it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8444to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8445work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8446@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8447
8448In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8449information that enables us to fix the bug.
8450
8451@menu
8452* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8453* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8454@end menu
8455
8456@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8457@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8458@cindex bug criteria
8459
8460If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8461
8462@itemize @bullet
8463@cindex fatal signal
8464@cindex linker crash
8465@cindex crash of linker
8466@item
8467If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8468@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8469
8470@cindex error on valid input
8471@item
ff5dcc92 8472If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8473
8474@cindex invalid input
8475@item
ff5dcc92 8476If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8477may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8478object files are correct.
8479
8480@item
8481If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8482improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8483@end itemize
8484
8485@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8486@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8487@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8488@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8489
8490A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8491products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8492recommend you contact that organization first.
8493
8494You can find contact information for many support companies and
8495individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8496distribution.
8497
ad22bfe8 8498@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8499Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8500@value{BUGURL}.
8501@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8502
8503The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8504@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8505fact or leave it out, state it!
8506
8507Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8508problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8509assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8510matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8511the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8512location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8513were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8514into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8515specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8516and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8517
8518Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8519the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8520on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8521
8522Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8523bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8524respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8525You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8526
8527To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8528
8529@itemize @bullet
8530@item
ff5dcc92 8531The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8532the @samp{--version} argument.
8533
8534Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8535the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8536
8537@item
ff5dcc92 8538Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8539patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8540
8541@item
8542The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8543version number.
8544
8545@item
ff5dcc92 8546What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8547``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8548
8549@item
8550The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8551observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8552list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8553sufficient.
8554
8555If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8556and then we might not encounter the bug.
8557
8558@item
8559A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8560bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8561provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8562bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8563state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8564requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8565we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8566attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8567
8568If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8569@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8570object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8571@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8572how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8573
8574@item
8575A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8576incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8577
ff5dcc92 8578Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8579will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8580not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8581a chance to make a mistake.
8582
8583Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8584say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8585copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8586C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8587and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8588fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8589you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8590any conclusion from our observations.
8591
8592@item
ff5dcc92 8593If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8594diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8595@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8596If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8597context, not by line number.
8598
8599The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8600sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8601@end itemize
8602
8603Here are some things that are not necessary:
8604
8605@itemize @bullet
8606@item
8607A description of the envelope of the bug.
8608
8609Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8610which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8611changes will not affect it.
8612
8613This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8614will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8615with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8616We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8617
8618Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8619of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8620output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8621less time, and so on.
8622
8623However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8624report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8625
8626@item
8627A patch for the bug.
8628
8629A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8630the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8631a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8632to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8633
ff5dcc92 8634Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8635construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8636through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8637able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8638fixed.
8639
8640And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8641patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8642help us to understand.
8643
8644@item
8645A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8646
8647Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8648things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8649@end itemize
8650
8651@node MRI
8652@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8653@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8654To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8655linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8656alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8657described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8658simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8659@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8660linker commands; these commands are described here.
8661
8662In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8663file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8664features to make use of them.
8665
8666You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8667@samp{-c} command-line option.
8668
8669Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8670command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8671blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8672MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8673issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8674
8675Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8676
8677You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8678lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8679The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8680
8681@table @code
8682@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8683@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8684@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8685Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8686the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8687@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8688your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8689script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8690commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8691input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8692@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8693
8694@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8695@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8696Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8697in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8698
8699@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8700
8701@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8702@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8703Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8704@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8705
8706@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8707@item BASE @var{expression}
8708Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8709absolute addresses) in the output file.
8710
8711@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8712@item CHIP @var{expression}
8713@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8714This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8715
8716@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8717@item END
8718This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8719
8720@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8721@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8722Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
dc12032b 8723language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
252b5132
RH
8724
8725@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8726@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8727Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8728@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8729
8730The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8731same line, with no change in its effect.
8732
8733@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8734@item LOAD @var{filename}
8735@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8736Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8737same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8738command line.
8739
8740@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8741@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8742@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8743MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8744option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8745
8746@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8747@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8748@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8749Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8750order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8751script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8752sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8753file, in the order specified.
8754
8755@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8756@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8757@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8758@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8759Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8760@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8761
8762@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8763@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8764@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8765@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8766You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8767specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8768If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8769@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8770@end table
8771
793c5807
NC
8772@node GNU Free Documentation License
8773@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8774@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8775
370b66a1
CD
8776@node LD Index
8777@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8778
8779@printindex cp
8780
8781@tex
7ca01ed9 8782% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8783% meantime:
8784\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8785\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8786\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8787\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8788\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8789\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8790\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8791\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8792\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8793% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8794@end tex
8795
252b5132 8796@bye
This page took 1.674134 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.